Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Dynamical Systems

166 missions · 73 completed

Missions

Open93Completed73All166
🏆Completed
AnalysisStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

On Well-Posedness of Forward–Backward SDEs—A Unified Approach 2: With Constant Coefficients and σ₃ = 0 the Dominating ODE Has a Bounded Solution for Every T Iff F Has a Suitable Zero or Is LinearResearch Paper

Motivation

A forward–backward stochastic differential equation (FBSDE) couples a forward diffusion XXX with a backward equation for a pair (Y,Z)(Y,Z)(Y,Z) whose terminal value depends on XTX_TXT​. FBSDEs are the probabilistic form of quasilinear parabolic PDEs and appear in stochastic control (the stochastic maximum principle), in mathematical finance (hedging with large investors, stochastic differential utility) and in mean-field games. Their solvability over an arbitrary horizon is delicate: the coupling can make a solution exist only on short time intervals.

Ma, Wu, Zhang and Zhang (arXiv:1110.4658v2, Ann. Appl. Probab. 25 (2015)) reduce well-posedness of a general one-dimensional FBSDE to the behaviour of two scalar dominating ODEs: when these have solutions that stay bounded on [0,T][0,T][0,T], the FBSDE has a regular decoupling field and a unique solution. Section 5.1 of the paper tests this programme on the simplest class, the linear FBSDE with constant coefficients, and obtains necessary and sufficient conditions. The authors describe these as setting the "limits" for the solvability of general FBSDEs.

Earlier approaches each covered part of the picture: the method of contraction mappings for small time (Antonelli 1993, MR1233625), the four-step scheme for Markovian FBSDEs with regular coefficients (Ma, Protter, Yong 1994, MR1262970), and the method of continuation under monotonicity conditions (Hu, Peng 1995, MR1355060; Peng, Wu 1999, MR1675098; later Yong 1997, MR1440146). The unified approach of the paper contains these as special cases.

Setting

Let b1,b2,b3,σ1,σ2,f1,f2,f3,hb_1,b_2,b_3,\sigma_1,\sigma_2,f_1,f_2,f_3,hb1​,b2​,b3​,σ1​,σ2​,f1​,f2​,f3​,h be real numbers and consider the linear FBSDE (4.1)

Xt=1+∫0t(b1X+b2Y+b3Z) ds+∫0t(σ1X+σ2Y+σ3Z) dB,Yt=hXT+∫tT(f1X+f2Y+f3Z) ds−∫tTZ dB,\mathcal X_t=1+\int_0^t(b_1\mathcal X+b_2\mathcal Y+b_3\mathcal Z)\,ds+\int_0^t(\sigma_1\mathcal X+\sigma_2\mathcal Y+\sigma_3\mathcal Z)\,dB,\qquad \mathcal Y_t=h\mathcal X_T+\int_t^T(f_1\mathcal X+f_2\mathcal Y+f_3\mathcal Z)\,ds-\int_t^T\mathcal Z\,dB,Xt​=1+∫0t​(b1​X+b2​Y+b3​Z)ds+∫0t​(σ1​X+σ2​Y+σ3​Z)dB,Yt​=hXT​+∫tT​(f1​X+f2​Y+f3​Z)ds−∫tT​ZdB,

in Case 1, σ3=0\sigma_3=0σ3​=0. Then the two dominating ODEs coincide and become the scalar backward equation

yt=h+∫tTF(ys) ds,t∈[0,T],(5.3)y_t=h+\int_t^T F(y_s)\,ds,\qquad t\in[0,T], \tag{5.3}yt​=h+∫tT​F(ys​)ds,t∈[0,T],(5.3)

with the cubic

F(y)=f1+[f2+b1+σ1f3] y+[b2+f3σ2+b3σ1] y2+σ2b3 y3.(5.4)F(y)=f_1+[f_2+b_1+\sigma_1f_3]\,y+[b_2+f_3\sigma_2+b_3\sigma_1]\,y^2+\sigma_2b_3\,y^3 . \tag{5.4}F(y)=f1​+[f2​+b1​+σ1​f3​]y+[b2​+f3​σ2​+b3​σ1​]y2+σ2​b3​y3.(5.4)

In the Appendix's notation (A.3), F(y)=f1+a1y+a2y2+a3y3F(y)=f_1+a_1y+a_2y^2+a_3y^3F(y)=f1​+a1​y+a2​y2+a3​y3 with a1=f2+b1+σ1f3a_1=f_2+b_1+\sigma_1f_3a1​=f2​+b1​+σ1​f3​, a2=b2+f3σ2+b3σ1a_2=b_2+f_3\sigma_2+b_3\sigma_1a2​=b2​+f3​σ2​+b3​σ1​, a3=σ2b3a_3=\sigma_2b_3a3​=σ2​b3​.

A solution on [0,T][0,T][0,T] of yt=h+∫tTG(s,ys) dsy_t=h+\int_t^TG(s,y_s)\,dsyt​=h+∫tT​G(s,ys​)ds is a function yyy such that, for every t∈[0,T]t\in[0,T]t∈[0,T], s↦G(s,ys)s\mapsto G(s,y_s)s↦G(s,ys​) is integrable on [t,T][t,T][t,T] and the equation holds at ttt. A bounded solution additionally has sup⁡[0,T]∣y∣<∞\sup_{[0,T]}|y|<\inftysup[0,T]​∣y∣<∞. In Lean the coefficients form the structure UnifiedFBSDE.Cubic.Coeffs, FFF is Coeffs.F, and the predicates are IsSolution and IsBoundedSolution.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.3

(∀T>0, ∃ y bounded solution of (5.3) on [0,T])  ⟺  {(i) F(h)≥0 and F(λ)=0 for some λ≥h, or(ii) F(h)≤0 and F(λ)=0 for some λ≤h, or(iii) σ2b3=0 and b2+f3σ2+b3σ1=0.\Big(\forall T>0,\ \exists\,y \text{ bounded solution of (5.3) on }[0,T]\Big)\iff \begin{cases} \text{(i) } F(h)\ge0 \text{ and } F(\lambda)=0 \text{ for some }\lambda\ge h,\ \text{or}\\ \text{(ii) } F(h)\le0 \text{ and } F(\lambda)=0 \text{ for some }\lambda\le h,\ \text{or}\\ \text{(iii) } \sigma_2b_3=0 \text{ and } b_2+f_3\sigma_2+b_3\sigma_1=0. \end{cases}(∀T>0, ∃y bounded solution of (5.3) on [0,T])⟺⎩⎨⎧​(i) F(h)≥0 and F(λ)=0 for some λ≥h, or(ii) F(h)≤0 and F(λ)=0 for some λ≤h, or(iii) σ2​b3​=0 and b2​+f3​σ2​+b3​σ1​=0.​

Milestones

  1. Lemma 5.1: comparison for backward ODEs. Between a bounded sub-solution and a bounded super-solution, (5.1) has a unique solution.
  2. Remark 5.2: a checkable sufficient condition for hypothesis (iv) of Lemma 5.1.
  3. Sufficiency of (i), (ii): the solution stays in [h,λ][h,\lambda][h,λ] (resp. [λ,h][\lambda,h][λ,h]).
  4. (5.5): under (iii), (5.3) is linear and has a bounded solution.
  5. (A.4): if a3>0a_3>0a3​>0 and FFF has no zero in [h,∞)[h,\infty)[h,∞), then F(y)≥ε(y−y1)3F(y)\ge\varepsilon(y-y_1)^3F(y)≥ε(y−y1​)3 on [h,∞)[h,\infty)[h,∞) for some ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, y1<hy_1<hy1​<h.
  6. (A.6): the explicit comparison solution y~t−y1=(2ε(t−T)+(h−y1)−2)−1/2\tilde y_t-y_1=(2\varepsilon(t-T)+(h-y_1)^{-2})^{-1/2}y~​t​−y1​=(2ε(t−T)+(h−y1​)−2)−1/2 and its blow-up time T−1/(2ε(h−y1)2)T-1/(2\varepsilon(h-y_1)^2)T−1/(2ε(h−y1​)2).
  7. Blow-up by comparison: a continuous G≥ε(y−y1)3G\ge\varepsilon(y-y_1)^3G≥ε(y−y1​)3 on [h,∞)[h,\infty)[h,∞) admits no solution on [0,T][0,T][0,T] when T>1/(2ε(h−y1)2)T>1/(2\varepsilon(h-y_1)^2)T>1/(2ε(h−y1​)2).
  8. Case 2: if a3=0a_3=0a3​=0, a2>0a_2>0a2​>0, F(h)>0F(h)>0F(h)>0 and FFF has no zero above hhh, then F(y)≥ε(y−y1)2F(y)\ge\varepsilon(y-y_1)^2F(y)≥ε(y−y1​)2 on [h,∞)[h,\infty)[h,∞) and (5.3) has no solution for TTT large.

Companion: Theorem 5.4

For a fixed horizon TTT: (i) σ2b3<0\sigma_2b_3<0σ2​b3​<0 or F(h)=0F(h)=0F(h)=0; (ii) F(h)>0F(h)>0F(h)>0, σ2b3≤ε\sigma_2b_3\le\varepsilonσ2​b3​≤ε, a2≤εa_2\le\varepsilona2​≤ε; (iii) F(h)<0F(h)<0F(h)<0, σ2b3≤ε\sigma_2b_3\le\varepsilonσ2​b3​≤ε, a2≥−εa_2\ge-\varepsilona2​≥−ε, with ε=ε(T)\varepsilon=\varepsilon(T)ε=ε(T) small. Each guarantees a bounded solution on [0,T][0,T][0,T].

Significance

Theorem 5.3 turns the existence of a global bounded solution of the dominating ODE into a finite check on a cubic polynomial: the sign of F(h)F(h)F(h), the location of a real root, and two coefficient identities. Through the paper's main construction, a bounded solution yields a uniformly Lipschitz decoupling field, and hence well-posedness of the linear FBSDE on any horizon. When none of (i)–(iii) holds, the dominating ODE explodes in finite time. This is the sense in which the paper says the constant-coefficient results "more or less set the 'limits'" for the solvability of general FBSDEs: the conditions it later imposes on random coefficients (§5.2, §7) are modelled on the cases (i)–(iii).

The result is proved in the paper: sufficiency on p. 21, necessity in the Appendix (pp. 46–47). To our knowledge none of it is machine-checked. A formalization produces a reusable comparison theorem for scalar backward integral equations with Lipschitz-on-a-band nonlinearities (Lemma 5.1), explicit finite-time blow-up criteria for polynomial ODEs, and a complete, checked classification of global solvability for the cubic Riccati-type equation (5.3).

Difficulty

Sufficiency rests on Lemma 5.1, which requires Carathéodory existence and uniqueness for an equation that is only Lipschitz on a time-dependent band, followed by an integrating-factor comparison argument. Mathlib's Picard–Lindelöf and Gronwall tools are stated for forward equations with continuous right-hand sides, so they need adaptation.

Necessity is a case analysis whose obvious version fails at two points. First, one cannot simply bound FFF below by a3(y−y1)3a_3(y-y_1)^3a3​(y−y1​)3 using the smallest real root: the intermediate inequality (A.5) as printed points the wrong way for some root orderings, and the correct bound uses the largest root or an infimum over [h,∞)[h,\infty)[h,∞). Second, the blow-up step compares a solution of (5.3) with an explicit exploding solution. This needs the solution to stay above hhh for the whole interval, which in turn needs continuity of the right-hand side. For a discontinuous right-hand side the comparison fails.

Formalization scope

Time is real, with 0<T0<T0<T and t∈[0,T]t\in[0,T]t∈[0,T]. Solutions are functions R→R\mathbb R\to\mathbb RR→R whose values outside [0,T][0,T][0,T] are irrelevant. The integral ∫tT\int_t^T∫tT​ is Mathlib's interval integral. "For arbitrary TTT" is ∀T>0, ∃y\forall T>0,\ \exists y∀T>0, ∃y, with the universal quantifier outside. "A zero point in [h,∞)[h,\infty)[h,∞)" is ∃λ≥h, F(λ)=0\exists\lambda\ge h,\ F(\lambda)=0∃λ≥h, F(λ)=0.

Pinned readings, all disclosed in the items:

  • Lemma 5.1 adds y1≤y2y^1\le y^2y1≤y2 on [0,T][0,T][0,T] (the lemma is false without it), L≥0L\ge0L≥0, and integrability of c1,c2c^1,c^2c1,c2. Its α\alphaα ranges over measurable functions with ∣α∣≤L|\alpha|\le L∣α∣≤L, and FiF^iFi is measurable on R×R\mathbb R\times\mathbb RR×R.
  • The blow-up milestone assumes GGG continuous.
  • In Theorem 5.4(ii)–(iii), ε\varepsilonε is chosen after TTT, hhh, f1f_1f1​ and a1a_1a1​, the data its proof uses.
  • (A.5) is not stated.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out. The solution predicate carries integrability of the integrand, so Lean's junk value 000 for a non-integrable integral cannot make an arbitrary yyy with yt=hy_t=hyt​=h a solution. The goal assumes neither a zero of FFF nor a blow-up: both are proved in the milestones. Lemma 5.1's uniqueness is over solutions in the band.

The needed infrastructure is scalar ODE theory on Mathlib: existence for Lipschitz Carathéodory equations, differentiation of t↦∫tTgt\mapsto\int_t^T gt↦∫tT​g, comparison of sub- and super-solutions, and elementary real-root facts for cubics. The comparison lemma and the blow-up lemma are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions of either the sufficiency or the necessity chain are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • J. Ma, Z. Wu, D. Zhang, J. Zhang, On well-posedness of forward–backward SDEs—a unified approach, Ann. Appl. Probab. 25(4):2168–2214, 2015. https://arxiv.org/abs/1110.4658 , https://doi.org/10.1214/14-AAP1046
  • F. Antonelli, Backward–forward stochastic differential equations, Ann. Appl. Probab. 3(3):777–793, 1993. MR1233625, https://mathscinet.ams.org/mathscinet-getitem?mr=1233625
  • J. Ma, P. Protter, J. Yong, Solving forward–backward stochastic differential equations explicitly—a four step scheme, Probab. Theory Related Fields 98:339–359, 1994. MR1262970, https://mathscinet.ams.org/mathscinet-getitem?mr=1262970
  • Y. Hu, S. Peng, Solution of forward–backward stochastic differential equations, Probab. Theory Related Fields 103:273–283, 1995. MR1355060, https://mathscinet.ams.org/mathscinet-getitem?mr=1355060
  • S. Peng, Z. Wu, Fully coupled forward–backward stochastic differential equations and applications to optimal control, SIAM J. Control Optim. 37(3):825–843, 1999. MR1675098, https://mathscinet.ams.org/mathscinet-getitem?mr=1675098
  • J. Yong, Finding adapted solutions of forward–backward stochastic differential equations: method of continuation, Probab. Theory Related Fields 107:537–572, 1997. MR1440146, https://mathscinet.ams.org/mathscinet-getitem?mr=1440146
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Differential Equation for Modeling Nesterov's Accelerated Gradient Method: Theory and Insights V: The Speed Restarted ODE Converges Linearly for Strongly Convex fResearch Paper

Motivation

Nesterov's accelerated gradient method minimizes a convex function fff with LLL-Lipschitz gradient at the rate O(1/k2)O(1/k^2)O(1/k2), which is optimal among first-order methods. For a μ\muμ-strongly convex fff the method with the generic momentum coefficient (k−1)/(k+2)(k-1)/(k+2)(k−1)/(k+2) does not exploit the strong convexity: Su, Boyd and Candès show in §4.2 of arXiv:1503.01243 that its rate stays polynomial. Linear convergence O((1−μ/L)k)O((1-\sqrt{\mu/L})^k)O((1−μ/L​)k) is available with the momentum (L−μ)/(L+μ)(\sqrt L-\sqrt\mu)/(\sqrt L+\sqrt\mu)(L​−μ​)/(L​+μ​), but this requires knowing μ\muμ, which is rarely available in practice.

Restarting is the practical remedy. O'Donoghue and Candès (2013) proposed gradient restarting: reset the momentum whenever the objective increases. It is observed to recover linear convergence, but no rate was proved for it. Section 5 of Su, Boyd and Candès proposes a variant, speed restarting, which resets the momentum when the speed of the iterates stops increasing, and proves a linear rate for its continuous-time limit. This mission formalizes that result, Theorem 10 of the paper, and the lemmas it rests on.

Setting

Write Rn\mathbb R^nRn with the Euclidean norm. A function f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R is in FL\mathcal F_LFL​ if it is convex and continuously differentiable with ∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥\|\nabla f(x)-\nabla f(y)\|\le L\|x-y\|∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥. It is in Sμ\mathcal S_\muSμ​ if it is continuously differentiable and f(x)−μ∥x∥2/2f(x)-\mu\|x\|^2/2f(x)−μ∥x∥2/2 is convex. The class Sμ,L=FL∩Sμ\mathcal S_{\mu,L}=\mathcal F_L\cap\mathcal S_\muSμ,L​=FL​∩Sμ​ with 0<μ≤L0<\mu\le L0<μ≤L is the standing assumption of the whole mission. A minimizer is written x⋆x^\starx⋆ and f⋆=f(x⋆)f^\star=f(x^\star)f⋆=f(x⋆); the ratio L/μL/\muL/μ is the condition number.

The Nesterov ODE is

X¨(t)+3tX˙(t)+∇f(X(t))=0,X(0)=x0, X˙(0)=0,(3)\ddot X(t)+\frac3t\dot X(t)+\nabla f(X(t))=0,\qquad X(0)=x_0,\ \dot X(0)=0, \tag{3}X¨(t)+t3​X˙(t)+∇f(X(t))=0,X(0)=x0​, X˙(0)=0,(3)

the continuous-time limit of Nesterov's scheme with step size tending to zero. The paper's Theorem 1 shows it has a unique solution in C2((0,∞))∩C1([0,∞))C^2((0,\infty))\cap C^1([0,\infty))C2((0,∞))∩C1([0,∞)). In Lean a solution is a pair (X,V)(X,V)(X,V) with V=X˙V=\dot XV=X˙ (IsSolution f 3 x₀ X V).

The speed restarting time of the solution from x0x_0x0​ is

T=T(x0;f)=sup⁡{t>0: ∀u∈(0,t), d∥X˙(u)∥2du>0},T=T(x_0;f)=\sup\Bigl\{t>0:\ \forall u\in(0,t),\ \frac{\mathrm d\|\dot X(u)\|^2}{\mathrm du}>0\Bigr\},T=T(x0​;f)=sup{t>0: ∀u∈(0,t), dud∥X˙(u)∥2​>0},

the first time at which the speed ∥X˙∥\|\dot X\|∥X˙∥ decreases (restartTime; the set is restartSet).

The speed restarted ODE (29) replaces 3/t3/t3/t by 3/tsr3/t_{\mathrm{sr}}3/tsr​, where tsr=t−τt_{\mathrm{sr}}=t-\tautsr​=t−τ is the time since the latest restart τ\tauτ. Its solution XsrX^{\mathrm{sr}}Xsr starts at x0x_0x0​, follows (3) from x0x_0x0​ for time T1=T(x0;f)T_1=T(x_0;f)T1​=T(x0​;f), then follows (3) from Xsr(T1)X^{\mathrm{sr}}(T_1)Xsr(T1​) for time T2=T(Xsr(T1);f)T_2=T(X^{\mathrm{sr}}(T_1);f)T2​=T(Xsr(T1​);f), and so on. If a restart point is a minimizer the trajectory stays there. In Lean this is the predicate IsSpeedRestarted f x₀ Xsr.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 10

There are positive constants c1,c2c_1,c_2c1​,c2​, depending only on L/μL/\muL/μ, such that for every f∈Sμ,Lf\in\mathcal S_{\mu,L}f∈Sμ,L​, every x0x_0x0​ and every t≥0t\ge0t≥0,

f(Xsr(t))−f⋆≤c1L∥x0−x⋆∥22 e−c2tL.f(X^{\mathrm{sr}}(t))-f^\star\le\frac{c_1L\|x_0-x^\star\|^2}2\,e^{-c_2t\sqrt L}.f(Xsr(t))−f⋆≤2c1​L∥x0​−x⋆∥2​e−c2​tL​.

The constants are left unspecified, so the goal survives improvements of them.

Milestones

For one unrestarted solution XXX of (3), with M(t)=sup⁡u∈(0,t]∥X˙(u)∥/uM(t)=\sup_{u\in(0,t]}\|\dot X(u)\|/uM(t)=supu∈(0,t]​∥X˙(u)∥/u:

  • Lemma 11. For t<12/Lt<\sqrt{12/L}t<12/L​: M(t)≤∥∇f(x0)∥/(4(1−Lt2/12))M(t)\le\|\nabla f(x_0)\|/(4(1-Lt^2/12))M(t)≤∥∇f(x0​)∥/(4(1−Lt2/12)).
  • (30). For 0<t<12/L0<t<\sqrt{12/L}0<t<12/L​: ∣ ∥X˙(t)∥−t4∥∇f(x0)∥ ∣≤L∥∇f(x0)∥t3/(48(1−Lt2/12))\bigl|\,\|\dot X(t)\|-\tfrac t4\|\nabla f(x_0)\|\,\bigr|\le L\|\nabla f(x_0)\|t^3/(48(1-Lt^2/12))​∥X˙(t)∥−4t​∥∇f(x0​)∥​≤L∥∇f(x0​)∥t3/(48(1−Lt2/12)).
  • Lemma 25. If x0≠x⋆x_0\ne x^\starx0​=x⋆: T(x0,f)≥4/(5L)T(x_0,f)\ge 4/(5\sqrt L)T(x0​,f)≥4/(5L​).
  • Descent display. df(X(t))dt=−3t∥X˙∥2−12d∥X˙∥2dt≤0\dfrac{\mathrm df(X(t))}{\mathrm dt}=-\dfrac3t\|\dot X\|^2-\dfrac12\dfrac{\mathrm d\|\dot X\|^2}{\mathrm dt}\le0dtdf(X(t))​=−t3​∥X˙∥2−21​dtd∥X˙∥2​≤0 for t≤Tt\le Tt≤T.
  • Lemma 12. For a universal C>0C>0C>0: f(X(T))−f⋆≤(1−Cμ/L)(f(x0)−f⋆)f(X(T))-f^\star\le(1-C\mu/L)(f(x_0)-f^\star)f(X(T))−f⋆≤(1−Cμ/L)(f(x0​)−f⋆).
  • Lemma 13. For a universal C~\tilde CC~: T≤4exp⁡(C~L/μ)/(5L)T\le 4\exp(\tilde CL/\mu)/(5\sqrt L)T≤4exp(C~L/μ)/(5L​).

Significance

Theorem 10 is a linear convergence guarantee for a momentum method that does not need μ\muμ: the restart rule only watches the speed. The paper presents it as a new result; gradient restarting has no comparable theorem. It also gives a framework for analyzing restart rules: each restart decreases the gap by a factor depending on L/μL/\muL/μ (Lemma 12), and restarts happen at a rate bounded below (Lemmas 13 and 25). Section 5.3 of the paper reports that the discrete analogue of the scheme (Algorithm 1) converges linearly in experiments.

The results are proved in the paper, but not formalized anywhere to our knowledge; the platform has no statement about restarting the Nesterov ODE. The formal work is the full proof, in particular the analysis of (3) near its singular point t=0t=0t=0. Sharper constants are of interest: the paper conjectures that T=O(L/μ)T=O(\sqrt L/\mu)T=O(L​/μ) for a large class of fff, which would improve c2c_2c2​, and the generalization to friction r/tr/tr/t with r>3r>3r>3 mentioned after Theorem 10 is a natural further target.

Difficulty

The ODE (3) is singular at t=0t=0t=0, so the standard Picard–Lindelöf theory does not apply there, and the small-time estimates (Lemma 11, (30), Lemma 25) must control the solution uniformly up to t=0t=0t=0, where the friction coefficient 3/t3/t3/t is unbounded. Lemma 11 bounds a supremum by a quantity that involves the same supremum; this argument needs a separate proof that the supremum is finite.

The speed restarting time is defined as a supremum, and neither T>0T>0T>0 nor T<∞T<\inftyT<∞ follows from the definition. The restarted trajectory is assembled from infinitely many segments, and the number of restarts before time ttt needs a lower bound. The obvious route through the O(1/t2)O(1/t^2)O(1/t2) rate of the unrestarted ODE gives only a polynomial rate, because it does not use strong convexity in a way that survives the restarts.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), ∇f\nabla f∇f is Mathlib's gradient, LLL is an NNReal, and Sμ\mathcal S_\muSμ​ is the paper's literal definition. The classes FL\mathcal F_LFL​, Sμ,L\mathcal S_{\mu,L}Sμ,L​ and the solution predicate of (3) come from the series' shared definitions (NesterovODE.WellPosed.Setting, NesterovODE.StrongCvx.Setting); the speed restarting time and the restarted trajectory sit in this mission's Setting definition, namespace NesterovODE.Restart.

Conventions the formalization commits to:

  • Solutions of (3) are pairs (X,V)(X,V)(X,V), quantified over: every solution in the regularity class of Theorem 1 is covered. Values at negative times are unconstrained.
  • 12d∥X˙∥2/du\tfrac12\mathrm d\|\dot X\|^2/\mathrm du21​d∥X˙∥2/du is written as ⟨V(u),−3uV(u)−∇f(X(u))⟩\langle V(u),-\tfrac3uV(u)-\nabla f(X(u))\rangle⟨V(u),−u3​V(u)−∇f(X(u))⟩, its value along a solution.
  • M(t)M(t)M(t) is not defined; Lemma 11 is stated as a bound on every ∥X˙(u)∥/u\|\dot X(u)\|/u∥X˙(u)∥/u, u∈(0,t]u\in(0,t]u∈(0,t].
  • Lean's sSup is 000 on an empty or unbounded set. Lemma 25 is stated as membership of 4/(5L)4/(5\sqrt L)4/(5L​) in the set defining TTT, and Lemma 13 as a bound on every element of that set, so neither can hold through this junk value.
  • The constants of Lemmas 12 and 13 are chosen before the dimension, fff, μ\muμ, LLL, x0x_0x0​ and the trajectory; those of Theorem 10 are functions of L/μL/\muL/μ chosen in the same position. Choosing them after fff would trivialize the statements and is ruled out.
  • Lemmas 11, 12, 13, 25, (30) and the descent display carry the standing assumption f∈Sμ,Lf\in\mathcal S_{\mu,L}f∈Sμ,L​; Lemmas 12, 13, 25 also carry x0≠x⋆x_0\ne x^\starx0​=x⋆, the paper's convention in §5. Theorem 10 holds for every x0x_0x0​.
  • The leftmost "0≤0\le0≤" of (30) is stated for 0<t≤6/L0<t\le\sqrt{6/L}0<t≤6/L​, the range on which it is true; the page writes it for all t<12/Lt<\sqrt{12/L}t<12/L​.
  • The restarted trajectory stays at a minimizer once it reaches one. Restart times tending to infinity is not assumed: it follows from Lemmas 25 and 13.

A complete development needs the analysis of (3) at t=0t=0t=0 (also the subject of mission I of this series), monotonicity arguments from derivative signs, and properties of strongly convex functions with Lipschitz gradient. The last two are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of any milestone, and statements with explicit constants, are welcome.

Selected references

  • W. Su, S. Boyd, E. J. Candès, A Differential Equation for Modeling Nesterov's Accelerated Gradient Method: Theory and Insights, arXiv:1503.01243v2, 2015; J. Mach. Learn. Res. 17(153):1–43, 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1503.01243
  • B. O'Donoghue, E. J. Candès, Adaptive Restart for Accelerated Gradient Schemes, Foundations of Computational Mathematics 15:715–732, 2015. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10208-013-9150-3
  • Y. Nesterov, A method of solving a convex programming problem with convergence rate O(1/k²), Soviet Mathematics Doklady 27:372–376, 1983.
  • Y. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course, Kluwer, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Differential Equation for Modeling Nesterov's Accelerated Gradient Method: Theory and Insights IV: For Strongly Convex f, f(X(t)) − f⋆ ≤ C‖x₀ − x⋆‖²/(μ^((α−2)/2) t^α) for 2 ≤ α ≤ 2r/3Research Paper

Motivation

Accelerated gradient methods minimize smooth convex functions with a characteristic momentum term. Su, Boyd, and Candès identified a continuous-time differential equation whose trajectories model that acceleration. The equation replaces an iteration index by continuous time and makes the effects of damping visible. This mission concerns the paper's strongly convex regime: the function has curvature everywhere, yet the ODE with damping proportional to 1/t1/t1/t is not simply a linear-rate method. Theorem 8 quantifies the faster polynomial rate that the authors establish when the damping parameter is large enough.

The paper first treats the coefficient 3/t3/t3/t, obtaining an inverse-square objective bound. In §4 it replaces 333 by rrr, and in §4.3 it combines larger damping with strong convexity. The result gives a family of exponents α\alphaα rather than a single preferred exponent. The rate reaches t−2r/3t^{-2r/3}t−2r/3 at the end of the allowed range. The paper also explains that simply raising rrr does not automatically improve every finite-time bound, because its constant can grow with rrr.

Setting

The state space is Euclidean Rn\mathbb R^nRn. A function belongs to FL\mathcal F_LFL​ when it is convex, continuously differentiable, and its gradient is LLL-Lipschitz for some L>0L>0L>0. It belongs to Sμ\mathcal S_\muSμ​ when it is continuously differentiable and x↦f(x)−μ∥x∥2/2x\mapsto f(x)-\mu\|x\|^2/2x↦f(x)−μ∥x∥2/2 is convex. The class Sμ,L\mathcal S_{\mu,L}Sμ,L​ is their intersection. For this mission μ>0\mu>0μ>0. A point x⋆x^\starx⋆ is any global minimizer, and f⋆=f(x⋆)f^\star=f(x^\star)f⋆=f(x⋆).

Given an initial point x0x_0x0​, a damping parameter rrr, and time t>0t>0t>0, the ODE trajectory satisfies

X¨(t)+rtX˙(t)+∇f(X(t))=0,X(0)=x0,X˙(0)=0.\ddot X(t)+\frac r t\dot X(t)+\nabla f(X(t))=0, \qquad X(0)=x_0,\quad \dot X(0)=0.X¨(t)+tr​X˙(t)+∇f(X(t))=0,X(0)=x0​,X˙(0)=0.

The velocity VVV records X˙\dot XX˙. The regularity asserted is X∈C2((0,∞))∩C1([0,∞))X\in C^2((0,\infty))\cap C^1([0,\infty))X∈C2((0,∞))∩C1([0,∞)). The paper writes “the solution” and says an earlier existence argument applies to general rrr; the formal statements quantify over every trajectory satisfying the ODE and initial conditions. This captures the rate claim without identifying functions at irrelevant negative times.

Two energy functions organize the chapter. The first, E5(t)E_5(t)E5​(t), weights the objective gap by 2t2/(r−1)2t^2/(r-1)2t2/(r−1) and adds (r−1)∥X(t)+tV(t)/(r−1)−x⋆∥2(r-1)\|X(t)+tV(t)/(r-1)-x^\star\|^2(r−1)∥X(t)+tV(t)/(r−1)−x⋆∥2. The second, E8(t;α)E_8(t;\alpha)E8​(t;α), weights the gap by tαt^\alphatα and adds ((2r−α)2tα−2/8)∥X(t)+2tV(t)/(2r−α)−x⋆∥2((2r-\alpha)^2t^{\alpha-2}/8)\|X(t)+2tV(t)/(2r-\alpha)-x^\star\|^2((2r−α)2tα−2/8)∥X(t)+2tV(t)/(2r−α)−x⋆∥2. The threshold tαt_\alphatα​ is (α−2)(2r−α)/(2μ)\sqrt{(\alpha-2)(2r-\alpha)/(2\mu)}(α−2)(2r−α)/(2μ)​ for α>2\alpha>2α>2. These are the paper's objects in §4.1 and §4.3, not alternate energies chosen for ease of formalization.

Formalization targets

Theorem 5: high-friction baseline

For r>3r>3r>3, the paper proves both a pointwise inverse-square estimate and a bound on accumulated weighted error:

f(X(t))−f⋆≤(r−1)2∥x0−x⋆∥22t2,∫0∞t(f(X(t))−f⋆) dt≤(r−1)2∥x0−x⋆∥22(r−3).f(X(t))-f^\star\leq\frac{(r-1)^2\|x_0-x^\star\|^2}{2t^2}, \qquad \int_0^\infty t(f(X(t))-f^\star)\,dt \leq\frac{(r-1)^2\|x_0-x^\star\|^2}{2(r-3)}.f(X(t))−f⋆≤2t2(r−1)2∥x0​−x⋆∥2​,∫0∞​t(f(X(t))−f⋆)dt≤2(r−3)(r−1)2∥x0​−x⋆∥2​.

Its energy derivative inequality (18) is an earlier milestone. Equation (24) gives the integrated bound for E8E_8E8​ at and after tαt_\alphatα​, and equation (26) bounds the energy at that threshold. Those two displays are additional milestones. Their full statements, including the intermediate inequalities, are retained in Lean.

Theorem 8: strongly convex rate

For every r,αr,\alphar,α with 2≤α≤2r/32\leq\alpha\leq2r/32≤α≤2r/3, there is a constant C=C(r,α)C=C(r,\alpha)C=C(r,α) such that

f(X(t))−f⋆≤C∥x0−x⋆∥2μ(α−2)/2tα(t>0).f(X(t))-f^\star\leq \frac{C\|x_0-x^\star\|^2}{\mu^{(\alpha-2)/2}t^\alpha} \qquad(t>0).f(X(t))−f⋆≤μ(α−2)/2tαC∥x0​−x⋆∥2​(t>0).

The constant does not depend on nnn, LLL, μ\muμ, fff, the minimizer, initial point, chosen solution, or time. At α=2\alpha=2α=2 the claim includes r=3r=3r=3; the threshold arguments used for α>2\alpha>2α>2 are not imposed on that boundary case.

Significance

The theorem says how curvature and damping change the continuous-time objective rate. It separates the exponent, which is set by rrr and α\alphaα, from the explicit dependence on strong convexity, μ−(α−2)/2\mu^{-(\alpha-2)/2}μ−(α−2)/2. The baseline Theorem 5 is also useful independently: its weighted integral estimate records more than an O(t−2)O(t^{-2})O(t−2) pointwise statement. The paper uses these continuous-time estimates to motivate comparisons with generalized discrete Nesterov schemes Su, Boyd, and Candès, §4.

This result is proved in the cited paper. The work here is to state its hypotheses, energy identities, and rate in Lean so that the established argument can be checked. The definitions of smooth and strongly convex classes, the singular-time solution predicate, and the calculus of real-power energies are reusable in other continuous-time optimization results. No machine-checked proof of these newly drafted statements is claimed by this proposal.

Difficulty

At t=0t=0t=0 the damping coefficient r/tr/tr/t is singular, so a statement that applies ordinary second-order ODE calculus across zero would miss the actual boundary condition. Away from zero, the ordinary inverse-square energy does not by itself deliver the stronger exponents of Theorem 8. The stronger energy has real powers of ttt and its derivative contains terms with different signs. Strong convexity controls some terms only after the threshold tαt_\alphatα​; the early-time and late-time regimes therefore have different estimates. The argument must also cover real exponents throughout [2,2r/3][2,2r/3][2,2r/3], including the endpoint α=2\alpha=2α=2.

Formalization scope

Lean uses EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) for Rn\mathbb R^nRn, with any natural number nnn. The function classes follow the literal definitions on page 5: convexity, continuous differentiability, a Lipschitz gradient with positive constant LLL, and convexity of f−μ∥⋅∥2/2f-\mu\|\cdot\|^2/2f−μ∥⋅∥2/2. The rate assumes μ>0\mu>0μ>0, implicit in the paper's denominator and in tαt_\alphatα​. A minimizer is supplied as a point satisfying f(x⋆)≤f(y)f(x^\star)\leq f(y)f(x⋆)≤f(y) for every yyy; it is not assumed to be a special optimizer returned by a choice function.

The ODE predicate includes the initial data, a right derivative for XXX at zero, right continuity of VVV at zero, and derivatives of both functions for positive time. It says nothing about negative time. Theorem 5 explicitly asserts integrability on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞) before bounding its integral, preventing the default value of a nonintegrable Bochner integral from satisfying the statement. Real powers are used only with positive bases. Every appearance of E5E_5E5​ is under r>1r>1r>1, and every use of E8E_8E8​ in a milestone is under α>2\alpha>2α>2 and α≤2r/3\alpha\leq2r/3α≤2r/3, so its denominators are nonzero.

In the goal, CCC is existentially quantified before the dimension, function, curvature and smoothness constants, trajectory, and time. A constant selected separately for each function or time would weaken Theorem 8 and is excluded. Contributions establishing the energy derivatives, the improper integral, the threshold estimates, and the real-exponent induction are all within scope. The statement of Theorem 8 keeps the paper's full exponent range even if some parts demand substantial new calculus support.

Selected references

  • Weijie Su, Stephen Boyd, and Emmanuel J. Candès, A Differential Equation for Modeling Nesterov's Accelerated Gradient Method: Theory and Insights, Journal of Machine Learning Research 17(153), 2016; arXiv:1503.01243v2, cited here by preprint pages 5, 12–13, and 17–19.
6 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Differential Equation for Modeling Nesterov's Accelerated Gradient Method: Theory and Insights II: The ODE Solution Satisfies f(X(t)) − f⋆ ≤ 2‖x₀ − x⋆‖²/t²Research Paper

Motivation

Nesterov's accelerated gradient method (Nesterov, 1983) minimizes a smooth convex function fff with the update

xk=yk−1−s∇f(yk−1),yk=xk+k−1k+2(xk−xk−1),x_k=y_{k-1}-s\nabla f(y_{k-1}),\qquad y_k=x_k+\frac{k-1}{k+2}(x_k-x_{k-1}),xk​=yk−1​−s∇f(yk−1​),yk​=xk​+k+2k−1​(xk​−xk−1​),

and, for step size s≤1/Ls\le 1/Ls≤1/L, attains f(xk)−f⋆≤2∥x0−x⋆∥2/(s(k+1)2)f(x_k)-f^\star\le 2\|x_0-x^\star\|^2/(s(k+1)^2)f(xk​)−f⋆≤2∥x0​−x⋆∥2/(s(k+1)2). The rate O(1/k2)O(1/k^2)O(1/k2) is optimal among first-order methods, yet the classical proof proceeds by an "estimate sequence" argument that offers little insight into why the momentum coefficient (k−1)/(k+2)(k-1)/(k+2)(k−1)/(k+2) works.

Su, Boyd and Candès (arXiv:1503.01243, J. Mach. Learn. Res. 17, 2016) showed that, as s→0s\to0s→0, the iterates track the solution of the second-order ordinary differential equation

X¨+3tX˙+∇f(X)=0,X(0)=x0, X˙(0)=0,\ddot X+\frac3t\dot X+\nabla f(X)=0,\qquad X(0)=x_0,\ \dot X(0)=0,X¨+t3​X˙+∇f(X)=0,X(0)=x0​, X˙(0)=0,

under the time identification t≈kst\approx k\sqrt st≈ks​. Their Theorem 3 is the continuous-time counterpart of Nesterov's rate. Its short proof by an energy (Lyapunov) function became the template for a large literature on continuous-time models of accelerated methods, including Wibisono, Wilson and Jordan's variational perspective (PNAS 2016) and Attouch, Chbani, Peypouquet and Redont's analysis of the damped system x¨+αtx˙+∇Φ(x)=0\ddot x+\frac\alpha t\dot x+\nabla\Phi(x)=0x¨+tα​x˙+∇Φ(x)=0 (Math. Program. 2018).

This mission formalizes Theorem 3 and the three steps of its proof.

Setting

Let n≥0n\ge0n≥0 and let Rn\mathbb R^nRn carry the Euclidean inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. For f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R differentiable, ∇f\nabla f∇f is its gradient.

  • For L>0L>0L>0, the class FL\mathcal F_LFL​ consists of the convex, continuously differentiable fff with ∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥\|\nabla f(x)-\nabla f(y)\|\le L\|x-y\|∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥ for all x,yx,yx,y. The class F∞\mathcal F_\inftyF∞​ is ⋃L>0FL\bigcup_{L>0}\mathcal F_L⋃L>0​FL​.
  • A minimizer x⋆x^\starx⋆ is any point with f(x⋆)≤f(y)f(x^\star)\le f(y)f(x⋆)≤f(y) for all yyy, and f⋆=f(x⋆)f^\star=f(x^\star)f⋆=f(x⋆).
  • A solution of the ODE (3) with initial point x0x_0x0​ is a curve XXX on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), twice continuously differentiable on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞) and continuously differentiable on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), with X(0)=x0X(0)=x_0X(0)=x0​, X˙(0)=0\dot X(0)=0X˙(0)=0, and X¨(t)+3tX˙(t)+∇f(X(t))=0\ddot X(t)+\frac3t\dot X(t)+\nabla f(X(t))=0X¨(t)+t3​X˙(t)+∇f(X(t))=0 for every t>0t>0t>0. The damping coefficient 3/t3/t3/t is singular at t=0t=0t=0; the paper's Theorem 1 shows that a unique such solution exists for every f∈F∞f\in\mathcal F_\inftyf∈F∞​.
  • The energy along a solution is
E(t)=t2(f(X(t))−f⋆)+2∥X(t)+t2X˙(t)−x⋆∥2.\mathcal E(t)=t^2\big(f(X(t))-f^\star\big)+2\Big\|X(t)+\frac t2\dot X(t)-x^\star\Big\|^2 .E(t)=t2(f(X(t))−f⋆)+2​X(t)+2t​X˙(t)−x⋆​2.

In the Lean development these are IsFL, IsFinfty, IsSolution f 3 x₀ X V and energy f xstar X V t, in the namespace NesterovODE.Rate, where V is the velocity X˙\dot XX˙.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3 (p. 7)

For every f∈F∞f\in\mathcal F_\inftyf∈F∞​, every minimizer x⋆x^\starx⋆, every x0x_0x0​ and every solution XXX of (3),

f(X(t))−f⋆≤2∥x0−x⋆∥2t2for all t>0.f(X(t))-f^\star\le\frac{2\|x_0-x^\star\|^2}{t^2}\qquad\text{for all }t>0.f(X(t))−f⋆≤t22∥x0​−x⋆∥2​for all t>0.

Milestones (proof of Theorem 3, pp. 7–8)

  1. Derivative of the energy. For t>0t>0t>0,
E˙=2t(f(X)−f⋆)+t2⟨∇f(X),X˙⟩+4⟨X+t2X˙−x⋆,32X˙+t2X¨⟩.\dot{\mathcal E}=2t(f(X)-f^\star)+t^2\langle\nabla f(X),\dot X\rangle+4\Big\langle X+\frac t2\dot X-x^\star,\frac32\dot X+\frac t2\ddot X\Big\rangle .E˙=2t(f(X)−f⋆)+t2⟨∇f(X),X˙⟩+4⟨X+2t​X˙−x⋆,23​X˙+2t​X¨⟩.
  1. The energy is nonincreasing. Using the ODE,
E˙=2t(f(X)−f⋆)+4⟨X−x⋆,−t2∇f(X)⟩=2t(f(X)−f⋆)−2t⟨X−x⋆,∇f(X)⟩≤0.\dot{\mathcal E}=2t(f(X)-f^\star)+4\Big\langle X-x^\star,-\frac t2\nabla f(X)\Big\rangle=2t(f(X)-f^\star)-2t\langle X-x^\star,\nabla f(X)\rangle\le0 .E˙=2t(f(X)−f⋆)+4⟨X−x⋆,−2t​∇f(X)⟩=2t(f(X)−f⋆)−2t⟨X−x⋆,∇f(X)⟩≤0.
  1. The bound chain. E\mathcal EE is nonincreasing on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) and, for t>0t>0t>0,
f(X(t))−f⋆≤E(t)t2≤E(0)t2=2∥x0−x⋆∥2t2.f(X(t))-f^\star\le\frac{\mathcal E(t)}{t^2}\le\frac{\mathcal E(0)}{t^2}=\frac{2\|x_0-x^\star\|^2}{t^2}.f(X(t))−f⋆≤t2E(t)​≤t2E(0)​=t22∥x0​−x⋆∥2​.

Significance

Theorem 3 is the statement that makes the ODE a faithful model of Nesterov's scheme at the level of rates: under t≈kst\approx k\sqrt st≈ks​, the bound (7) reproduces the discrete bound (6) with the same constant 2. The paper also shows that the constant cannot be improved (p. 8). The energy E\mathcal EE is the continuous analogue of the potential used in discrete proofs, and the same template, with other weights, gives the paper's later results on the generalized damping r/tr/tr/t and on strongly convex objectives.

The result is proved in the paper. As far as the platform and Mathlib are concerned it is not formalized: Mathlib has the calculus (derivatives of inner products and norms along curves, the first-order characterization of convexity, monotonicity from a sign of the derivative) but no statement about this ODE. A machine-checked proof establishes the Lyapunov argument for the singular-at-zero system, including the endpoint t=0t=0t=0 where only one-sided regularity is available, and supplies reusable lemmas for the other missions of this series and for formalizations of inertial dynamics with vanishing damping.

Difficulty

The algebra is short; the care lies in the analytic bookkeeping that the paper leaves implicit.

  • The energy is defined through f∘Xf\circ Xf∘X and ∥X+t2X˙−x⋆∥2\|X+\frac t2\dot X-x^\star\|^2∥X+2t​X˙−x⋆∥2, so its derivative needs the chain rule for a C1C^1C1 function along a differentiable curve and the derivative of a squared norm of a curve.
  • The ODE holds only for t>0t>0t>0 and the coefficient 3/t3/t3/t blows up at 000. Monotonicity of E\mathcal EE on the closed half-line therefore needs right-continuity of E\mathcal EE at 000, which follows from right-continuity of XXX and X˙\dot XX˙ there, together with tX˙(t)→0t\dot X(t)\to0tX˙(t)→0; the derivative argument alone gives monotonicity only on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞).
  • The sign of E˙\dot{\mathcal E}E˙ needs the first-order inequality f(x⋆)≥f(X)+⟨∇f(X),x⋆−X⟩f(x^\star)\ge f(X)+\langle\nabla f(X),x^\star-X\ranglef(x⋆)≥f(X)+⟨∇f(X),x⋆−X⟩ for a differentiable convex function.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), ∇f\nabla f∇f is Mathlib's gradient f. f∈FLf\in\mathcal F_Lf∈FL​ is 0 < L ∧ ConvexOn ℝ Set.univ f ∧ ContDiff ℝ 1 f ∧ LipschitzWith L (gradient f) with L : NNReal.
  • A solution is encoded as a pair of curves (X,V)(X,V)(X,V): X(0)=x0X(0)=x_0X(0)=x0​, V(0)=0V(0)=0V(0)=0, XXX has right derivative V(0)V(0)V(0) at 000, VVV is right-continuous at 000, and for every t>0t>0t>0, XXX has derivative V(t)V(t)V(t) and VVV has derivative −3tV(t)−∇f(X(t))-\frac3tV(t)-\nabla f(X(t))−t3​V(t)−∇f(X(t)). For continuous ∇f\nabla f∇f this is exactly the paper's regularity class C2((0,∞))∩C1([0,∞))C^2((0,\infty))\cap C^1([0,\infty))C2((0,∞))∩C1([0,∞)) with the ODE and the initial conditions. Values of XXX for t<0t<0t<0 are unconstrained and never used.
  • The paper states Theorem 3 for "the unique global solution". The Lean statements quantify over every solution and every minimizer, which by Theorem 1 is the same statement and does not depend on Theorem 1 (formalized in a separate mission of this series).
  • No hypothesis beyond the paper's is added. The Lipschitz constant is part of F∞\mathcal F_\inftyF∞​ and is kept although the proof of Theorem 3 does not use it quantitatively.
  • The bound is stated for t>0t>0t>0 only. At t=0t=0t=0 the right-hand side 2∥x0−x⋆∥2/02\|x_0-x^\star\|^2/02∥x0​−x⋆∥2/0 is 000 in Lean, and the inequality would be false.
  • The derivative statements use HasDerivAt rather than deriv, so no derivative silently takes the default value 000; the solution predicate is satisfiable (for f(x)=∥x∥2/2f(x)=\|x\|^2/2f(x)=∥x∥2/2, x0=0x_0=0x0​=0, the zero curve is a solution), so the goal is not vacuous.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the three milestones and of the goal; general lemmas on the derivative of t↦f(X(t))t\mapsto f(X(t))t↦f(X(t)) and t↦∥X(t)+t2V(t)−x⋆∥2t\mapsto\|X(t)+\frac t2V(t)-x^\star\|^2t↦∥X(t)+2t​V(t)−x⋆∥2; and the first-order convexity inequality in gradient form, which the strongly convex and generalized-damping missions of this series also need.

Selected references

  • W. Su, S. Boyd, E. J. Candès, A Differential Equation for Modeling Nesterov's Accelerated Gradient Method: Theory and Insights, J. Mach. Learn. Res. 17(153):1–43, 2016; cited from arXiv:1503.01243v2, 2015. https://arxiv.org/abs/1503.01243
  • Y. Nesterov, A method of solving a convex programming problem with convergence rate O(1/k²), Soviet Mathematics Doklady 27(2):372–376, 1983.
  • A. Wibisono, A. C. Wilson, M. I. Jordan, A variational perspective on accelerated methods in optimization, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 113(47):E7351–E7358, 2016. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.1614734113
  • H. Attouch, Z. Chbani, J. Peypouquet, P. Redont, Fast convergence of inertial dynamics and algorithms with asymptotic vanishing viscosity, Math. Program. 168:123–175, 2018. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-016-1065-5
5 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Control TheoryLinear algebra·Captain: mikedeng1

Lyapunov Equations, Energy Functionals, and Model Order Reduction of Bilinear and Stochastic Systems 1: States Reached from 0 Stay in Im P and Ker Q Gives Zero Output, for Gramians P, Q ≥ 0 of (3.6)Research Paper

Motivation

Balanced truncation is the standard method for reducing the state dimension of a linear control system while keeping its input–output behaviour: states that are both hard to reach and hard to observe are discarded. Its justification rests on two Gramians, the solutions PPP and QQQ of a pair of Lyapunov equations, whose quadratic forms measure how much input energy a state costs to reach and how much output energy it produces. For linear systems the facts are classical: the image of the controllability Gramian is the reachable subspace, and the kernel of the observability Gramian is the unobservable subspace.

Bilinear systems, in which the input multiplies the state, are the simplest nonlinear extension of linear control systems. Their generalized Lyapunov equations have the same form as the Lyapunov equations of linear stochastic systems with multiplicative noise, which is why Benner and Damm treat the two classes together. Balanced truncation was extended to them using the solutions of generalized Lyapunov equations (Al-Baiyat and Bettayeb, 1993; Gray and Mesko, 1998, both as cited by Benner and Damm). Benner and Damm, in Lyapunov Equations, Energy Functionals, and Model Order Reduction of Bilinear and Stochastic Systems (SIAM J. Control Optim. 49(2), 2011, doi:10.1137/09075041X), examine which of the linear-system energy interpretations survive for bilinear systems. Their Theorem 3.1 is the structural result that does survive: the kernels of the Gramians still identify states that are unreachable from the origin and states that produce no output, so these states can be eliminated without changing the transfer behaviour.

Setting

Fix n,m,p≥0n, m, p \ge 0n,m,p≥0 and real matrices A,N1,…,Nm∈Rn×nA, N_1,\dots,N_m\in\mathbb R^{n\times n}A,N1​,…,Nm​∈Rn×n, B∈Rn×mB\in\mathbb R^{n\times m}B∈Rn×m, C∈Rp×nC\in\mathbb R^{p\times n}C∈Rp×n. The bilinear control system (3.1)–(3.2) is

x˙=Ax+∑j=1mNjx uj+Bu,y=Cx,\dot x = Ax + \sum_{j=1}^m N_j x\,u_j + Bu,\qquad y = Cx,x˙=Ax+j=1∑m​Nj​xuj​+Bu,y=Cx,

with state x(t)∈Rnx(t)\in\mathbb R^nx(t)∈Rn, input u(t)=[u1(t),…,um(t)]T∈Rmu(t) = [u_1(t),\dots,u_m(t)]^T\in\mathbb R^mu(t)=[u1​(t),…,um​(t)]T∈Rm and output y(t)∈Rpy(t)\in\mathbb R^py(t)∈Rp. The homogeneous system (3.5) drops the term BuBuBu: x˙=Ax+∑jNjx uj\dot x = Ax + \sum_j N_j x\,u_jx˙=Ax+∑j​Nj​xuj​, y=Cxy = Cxy=Cx. The same mmm indexes the bilinear terms and the columns of BBB. Write x(t,x0,u)x(t, x_0, u)x(t,x0​,u) for a solution with input uuu and initial state x(0)=x0x(0) = x_0x(0)=x0​, and y(t,x0,u)=Cx(t,x0,u)y(t,x_0,u) = Cx(t,x_0,u)y(t,x0​,u)=Cx(t,x0​,u).

An admissible input is a function u:[0,∞)→Rmu:[0,\infty)\to\mathbb R^mu:[0,∞)→Rm that is integrable on every interval [0,T][0,T][0,T]. A solution with x(0)=x0x(0) = x_0x(0)=x0​ is a continuous x:[0,∞)→Rnx:[0,\infty)\to\mathbb R^nx:[0,∞)→Rn satisfying

x(t)=x0+∫0t(Ax(s)+∑j=1muj(s)Njx(s)+Bu(s)) ds(t≥0).x(t) = x_0 + \int_0^t \Big(Ax(s) + \sum_{j=1}^m u_j(s)N_jx(s) + Bu(s)\Big)\,ds\qquad (t\ge 0).x(t)=x0​+∫0t​(Ax(s)+j=1∑m​uj​(s)Nj​x(s)+Bu(s))ds(t≥0).

The generalized Lyapunov equations (3.6) are

AP+PAT+∑j=1mNjPNjT=−BBT,ATQ+QA+∑j=1mNjTQNj=−CTC.AP + PA^T + \sum_{j=1}^m N_jPN_j^T = -BB^T,\qquad A^TQ + QA + \sum_{j=1}^m N_j^TQN_j = -C^TC .AP+PAT+j=1∑m​Nj​PNjT​=−BBT,ATQ+QA+j=1∑m​NjT​QNj​=−CTC.

A solution PPP of the first is a controllability Gramian and a solution QQQ of the second an observability Gramian. "P≥0P\ge 0P≥0" means PPP is symmetric nonnegative definite; Im P\mathrm{Im}\,PImP and Ker P\mathrm{Ker}\,PKerP are its image and kernel.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1 (p. 695)

(a) If P≥0P\ge 0P≥0 solves the first equation of (3.6), then for every admissible input uuu

x(t,0,u)∈Im Pfor all t≥0.x(t,0,u)\in\mathrm{Im}\,P\qquad\text{for all } t\ge 0 .x(t,0,u)∈ImPfor all t≥0.

(b) If Q≥0Q\ge 0Q≥0 solves the second equation of (3.6) and x0∈Ker Qx_0\in\mathrm{Ker}\,Qx0​∈KerQ, then for the homogeneous system (3.5) and every admissible input uuu

y(t,x0,u)=Cx(t,x0,u)=0for all t≥0.y(t,x_0,u) = Cx(t,x_0,u) = 0\qquad\text{for all } t\ge 0 .y(t,x0​,u)=Cx(t,x0​,u)=0for all t≥0.

Milestones (the steps of the paper's proof, pp. 695–696)

  1. NjT Ker P⊂Ker P⊂Ker BTN_j^T\,\mathrm{Ker}\,P\subset\mathrm{Ker}\,P\subset\mathrm{Ker}\,B^TNjT​KerP⊂KerP⊂KerBT.
  2. AT Ker P⊂Ker PA^T\,\mathrm{Ker}\,P\subset\mathrm{Ker}\,PATKerP⊂KerP.
  3. Im P\mathrm{Im}\,PImP is invariant under the vector field of (3.1): z∈Im Pz\in\mathrm{Im}\,Pz∈ImP implies Az+∑jwjNjz+Bw∈Im PAz + \sum_j w_jN_jz + Bw\in\mathrm{Im}\,PAz+∑j​wj​Nj​z+Bw∈ImP for every w∈Rmw\in\mathbb R^mw∈Rm.
  4. Nj Ker Q⊂Ker Q⊂Ker CN_j\,\mathrm{Ker}\,Q\subset\mathrm{Ker}\,Q\subset\mathrm{Ker}\,CNj​KerQ⊂KerQ⊂KerC and A Ker Q⊂Ker QA\,\mathrm{Ker}\,Q\subset\mathrm{Ker}\,QAKerQ⊂KerQ.
  5. Ker Q\mathrm{Ker}\,QKerQ is invariant under the vector field of (3.5).

Significance

The result. Part (a) says that a state outside Im P\mathrm{Im}\,PImP cannot be reached from the origin by any input, so its controllability energy EcE_cEc​ is infinite; part (b) says that a state in Ker Q\mathrm{Ker}\,QKerQ is indistinguishable from the origin at the output, so its observability energy EoE_oEo​ is zero. Together they justify the first step of balanced truncation for bilinear systems (Remark 3.2 of the paper): the system can be restricted to Im P\mathrm{Im}\,PImP and projected along Ker Q\mathrm{Ker}\,QKerQ without changing its input–output map, after which the Gramians are nonsingular and can be balanced. The theorem needs neither stability of AAA nor uniqueness of the Gramians, so it applies to every nonnegative definite solution of (3.6). The rest of §3 of the paper shows that the finer, quantitative energy estimates of the linear case fail for bilinear systems; this qualitative statement is what remains exact.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; no machine-checked version is known. A formal proof yields a reusable invariance principle: a subspace that is invariant under every vector field z↦Az+∑jwjNjz+Bwz\mapsto Az + \sum_j w_jN_jz + Bwz↦Az+∑j​wj​Nj​z+Bw is invariant under the flow of the input-driven system, for merely integrable inputs. It also yields the linear-algebra lemmas relating kernels of nonnegative definite solutions of generalized Lyapunov equations to the system matrices, which are used throughout model reduction and stochastic stability theory.

Difficulty

The algebraic part (milestones 1, 2, 4) rests on the fact that for a nonnegative definite matrix MMM, vTMv=0v^TMv = 0vTMv=0 forces Mv=0Mv = 0Mv=0, applied to the terms of the Lyapunov equation tested against a kernel vector. The passage from the vector field to trajectories is where care is needed. The paper's sentence "x˙(t)∈Im P\dot x(t)\in\mathrm{Im}\,Px˙(t)∈ImP whenever x(t)∈Im Px(t)\in\mathrm{Im}\,Px(t)∈ImP, so Im P\mathrm{Im}\,PImP is invariant" is not by itself an argument: tangency of a vector field to a subspace implies invariance only together with a uniqueness or Gronwall-type estimate, and here the field depends on time through an input that is only integrable, so xxx is merely absolutely continuous and x˙\dot xx˙ exists only almost everywhere. A pointwise "the derivative points into the subspace" argument therefore does not apply as stated, and the step needs an estimate on the component of x(t)x(t)x(t) orthogonal to the subspace.

Formalization scope

The Lean development uses states Fin n → ℝ, matrices Matrix (Fin n) (Fin n) ℝ, the matrix–vector product *ᵥ, and indices j=1,…,mj = 1,\dots,mj=1,…,m as Fin m. Im P\mathrm{Im}\,PImP and Ker P\mathrm{Ker}\,PKerP are LinearMap.range and LinearMap.ker of Matrix.toLin' P; "P≥0P\ge 0P≥0" is Matrix.PosSemidef, which includes symmetry. Admissible inputs are integrable on every [0,T][0,T][0,T] (this contains L2[0,∞[L^2[0,\infty[L2[0,∞[, the input space of the paper's energy functionals). A solution is a function continuous on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) whose integrand is integrable on every [0,t][0,t][0,t] and which satisfies the integral equation for all t≥0t\ge 0t≥0; no uniqueness of solutions is presupposed, and the theorem is asserted for every such solution.

Two reading decisions are fixed. First, part (b) is stated for every admissible input uuu, not only for u=0u = 0u=0 as printed in the theorem: the paper's proof concludes "x(t,x0,u)∈Ker Qx(t,x_0,u)\in\mathrm{Ker}\,Qx(t,x0​,u)∈KerQ for all t≥0t\ge0t≥0, implying y(t,x0,u)=0y(t,x_0,u) = 0y(t,x0​,u)=0", and the theorem's clause "i.e., Eo(x0)=0E_o(x_0) = 0Eo​(x0​)=0" (with EoE_oEo​ a maximum over inputs) needs this form. The ∀u\forall u∀u statement contains the printed one. Second, the clauses "i.e., Ec(x0)=∞E_c(x_0) = \inftyEc​(x0​)=∞" and "i.e., Eo(x0)=0E_o(x_0) = 0Eo​(x0​)=0", which restate the conclusions through the energy functionals (3.3)–(3.4), are not formalized.

The statements must not be trivialized: assuming PPP positive definite makes (a) empty (Im P=Rn\mathrm{Im}\,P = \mathbb R^nImP=Rn), assuming AAA stable or the Gramians unique adds hypotheses the paper does not have, and a solution notion requiring C1C^1C1 trajectories for integrable inputs would make the solution set empty. None of these is used. A local check confirms the hypotheses have content: for A=−I2A = -I_2A=−I2​, N1=0N_1 = 0N1​=0, B=e1B = e_1B=e1​, the matrix P=diag(1/2,0)P = \mathrm{diag}(1/2, 0)P=diag(1/2,0) is a nonnegative definite solution of (3.6) with e2∉Im Pe_2\notin\mathrm{Im}\,Pe2​∈/ImP.

A complete development needs Mathlib's facts on nonnegative definite matrices, interval integrals of vector-valued functions, and a Gronwall inequality with an integrable coefficient. The flow-invariance lemma for input-driven linear-in-state systems is reusable beyond this mission. Contributions welcome: proofs of the five milestones, and the passage from vector-field invariance to trajectory invariance.

Selected references

  • P. Benner, T. Damm, Lyapunov Equations, Energy Functionals, and Model Order Reduction of Bilinear and Stochastic Systems, SIAM J. Control Optim. 49(2), 686–711, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1137/09075041X
  • S. A. Al-Baiyat, M. Bettayeb, A new model reduction scheme for k-power bilinear systems, Proceedings of the 32nd IEEE Conference on Decision and Control, San Antonio, 1993, pp. 22–27 (reference [1] of Benner–Damm).
  • W. S. Gray, J. Mesko, Energy functions and algebraic Gramians for bilinear systems, Preprints of the 4th IFAC Nonlinear Control Systems Design Symposium, Enschede, 1998, pp. 103–108 (reference [25] of Benner–Damm).
  • B. C. Moore, Principal component analysis in linear systems: Controllability, observability, and model reduction, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 26(1), 17–32, 1981. https://doi.org/10.1109/TAC.1981.1102568
8 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Fast Convergence of Inertial Dynamics and Algorithms with Asymptotic Vanishing Viscosity 1: For α > 3 Every Trajectory of ẍ + (α/t)ẋ + ∇Φ(x) = 0 Converges Weakly to a Minimizer of ΦResearch Paper

Motivation

Nesterov's accelerated gradient method and its proximal variant FISTA minimize a smooth convex function with a value gap of order O(1/k2)O(1/k^2)O(1/k2) after kkk iterations, against O(1/k)O(1/k)O(1/k) for plain gradient descent. They are among the most widely used first-order methods in large-scale optimization, signal processing and machine learning. Su, Boyd and Candès (JMLR 2016) observed that, for α=3\alpha = 3α=3, the second-order differential equation

x¨(t)+αt x˙(t)+∇Φ(x(t))=0(1)\ddot x(t) + \frac{\alpha}{t}\,\dot x(t) + \nabla\Phi(x(t)) = 0 \tag{1}x¨(t)+tα​x˙(t)+∇Φ(x(t))=0(1)

is a continuous-time limit of Nesterov's scheme, and proved Φ(x(t))−min⁡Φ=O(1/t2)\Phi(x(t)) - \min\Phi = O(1/t^2)Φ(x(t))−minΦ=O(1/t2) for α≥3\alpha \ge 3α≥3. A rate on the values says nothing about the trajectory itself: whether x(t)x(t)x(t) (or the iterates xkx_kxk​) converges at all was a long-standing question. The paper of Attouch, Chbani, Peypouquet and Redont answers it for α>3\alpha > 3α>3: every trajectory of (1) converges weakly to a minimizer of Φ\PhiΦ.

Timeline:

  • 1983 — Nesterov introduces the accelerated gradient method with an O(1/k2)O(1/k^2)O(1/k2) rate on the values.
  • 2000 — Alvarez proves weak convergence of the trajectories of the heavy ball with friction, x¨+γx˙+∇Φ(x)=0\ddot x + \gamma\dot x + \nabla\Phi(x) = 0x¨+γx˙+∇Φ(x)=0, whose damping is constant (SIAM J. Control Optim. 38).
  • 2009 — Beck and Teboulle extend it to composite problems (FISTA), still with a rate on the values only.
  • 2014–2016 — Su, Boyd, Candès identify (1) as the continuous model of Nesterov's method and prove the O(1/t2)O(1/t^2)O(1/t2) rate for α≥3\alpha\ge3α≥3.
  • 2015 — Attouch, Chbani, Peypouquet, Redont prove weak convergence of the trajectories of (1) for α>3\alpha > 3α>3 (this mission), and of the iterates of the corresponding algorithms; Chambolle and Dossal obtain the discrete result independently. The case α=3\alpha = 3α=3 remains open.

Setting

Let H\mathcal HH be a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, and let Φ:H→R\Phi:\mathcal H\to\mathbb RΦ:H→R be a continuously differentiable convex function with gradient ∇Φ\nabla\Phi∇Φ. Fix a damping parameter α>0\alpha>0α>0 and an initial time t0>0t_0>0t0​>0. A solution of (1) on [t0,+∞[[t_0,+\infty[[t0​,+∞[ is a pair of maps x,vx, vx,v from the time axis to H\mathcal HH such that, at every t≥t0t\ge t_0t≥t0​, xxx has derivative v(t)v(t)v(t) and vvv has derivative −αtv(t)−∇Φ(x(t))-\frac{\alpha}{t}v(t) - \nabla\Phi(x(t))−tα​v(t)−∇Φ(x(t)). So v=x˙v=\dot xv=x˙, and x¨\ddot xx¨ satisfies (1). The damping coefficient α/t\alpha/tα/t is singular at 000 and vanishes as t→+∞t\to+\inftyt→+∞; this is why the time origin is positive.

Three functions of time measure the progress of a solution:

  • the global energy W(t)=12∥x˙(t)∥2+Φ(x(t))W(t) = \frac12\|\dot x(t)\|^2 + \Phi(x(t))W(t)=21​∥x˙(t)∥2+Φ(x(t));
  • the anchored distance hz(t)=12∥x(t)−z∥2h_z(t) = \frac12\|x(t)-z\|^2hz​(t)=21​∥x(t)−z∥2 to a point z∈Hz\in\mathcal Hz∈H;
  • when Φ\PhiΦ has a minimizer x∗x^*x∗, the anchored energies, for λ,ξ≥0\lambda,\xi\ge0λ,ξ≥0,
Eλ,ξ(t)=t2(Φ(x(t))−min⁡Φ)+12∥λ(x(t)−x∗)+tx˙(t)∥2+ξ2∥x(t)−x∗∥2.\mathcal E_{\lambda,\xi}(t) = t^2\big(\Phi(x(t))-\min\Phi\big) + \tfrac12\|\lambda(x(t)-x^*) + t\dot x(t)\|^2 + \tfrac{\xi}{2}\|x(t)-x^*\|^2 .Eλ,ξ​(t)=t2(Φ(x(t))−minΦ)+21​∥λ(x(t)−x∗)+tx˙(t)∥2+2ξ​∥x(t)−x∗∥2.

x(t)x(t)x(t) converges weakly to xˉ\bar xxˉ as t→+∞t\to+\inftyt→+∞ if ⟨x(t),y⟩→⟨xˉ,y⟩\langle x(t),y\rangle\to\langle\bar x,y\rangle⟨x(t),y⟩→⟨xˉ,y⟩ for every y∈Hy\in\mathcal Hy∈H. A weak limit point of x(t)x(t)x(t) is the weak limit of a sequence x(sn)x(s_n)x(sn​) with sn→+∞s_n\to+\inftysn​→+∞. argmin⁡Φ\operatorname{argmin}\PhiargminΦ is the set of minimizers of Φ\PhiΦ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.16

If argmin⁡Φ≠∅\operatorname{argmin}\Phi\ne\emptysetargminΦ=∅ and α>3\alpha>3α>3, then for every solution xxx of (1) there is xˉ∈argmin⁡Φ\bar x\in\operatorname{argmin}\Phixˉ∈argminΦ with

x(t)⇀xˉ(t→+∞).x(t)\rightharpoonup\bar x\qquad(t\to+\infty).x(t)⇀xˉ(t→+∞).

The goal asserts only the qualitative conclusion; no rate or constant enters it.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 2.1 (energy dissipation): W˙(t)=−αt∥x˙(t)∥2\dot W(t) = -\frac{\alpha}{t}\|\dot x(t)\|^2W˙(t)=−tα​∥x˙(t)∥2 for t>t0t>t_0t>t0​; WWW is nonincreasing with a limit in R∪{−∞}\mathbb R\cup\{-\infty\}R∪{−∞}, finite when Φ\PhiΦ is bounded below.
  2. (7): h¨z(t)+αth˙z(t)+Φ(x(t))−Φ(z)≤∥x˙(t)∥2\ddot h_z(t) + \frac{\alpha}{t}\dot h_z(t) + \Phi(x(t)) - \Phi(z) \le \|\dot x(t)\|^2h¨z​(t)+tα​h˙z​(t)+Φ(x(t))−Φ(z)≤∥x˙(t)∥2.
  3. Lemma 2.2: ∫t0t1s(W(s)−Φ(z)) ds≤C−1th˙z(t)−32αW(t)\int_{t_0}^t \frac1s(W(s)-\Phi(z))\,ds \le C - \frac1t\dot h_z(t) - \frac{3}{2\alpha}W(t)∫t0​t​s1​(W(s)−Φ(z))ds≤C−t1​h˙z​(t)−2α3​W(t) with an explicit constant CCC.
  4. Theorem 2.3 i), ii) (minimizing property, every α>0\alpha>0α>0): lim⁡W(t)=lim⁡Φ(x(t))=inf⁡Φ∈R∪{−∞}\lim W(t) = \lim \Phi(x(t)) = \inf\Phi\in\mathbb R\cup\{-\infty\}limW(t)=limΦ(x(t))=infΦ∈R∪{−∞}, and every weak limit point of x(t)x(t)x(t) is a minimizer.
  5. Remark 2.6: the Lyapunov inequality for ddtEλ,ξ\frac{d}{dt}\mathcal E_{\lambda,\xi}dtd​Eλ,ξ​, and monotonicity of Eλ,λ(α−λ−1)\mathcal E_{\lambda,\lambda(\alpha-\lambda-1)}Eλ,λ(α−λ−1)​ for α≥3\alpha\ge3α≥3, 2≤λ≤α−12\le\lambda\le\alpha-12≤λ≤α−1.
  6. Theorem 2.14 ii) with (13), (15): for α>3\alpha>3α>3, ∥x(t)−x∗∥2≤E2,2(α−3)(t0)/(α−3)\|x(t)-x^*\|^2 \le \mathcal E_{2,2(\alpha-3)}(t_0)/(\alpha-3)∥x(t)−x∗∥2≤E2,2(α−3)​(t0​)/(α−3) and ∫t0∞t∥x˙(t)∥2 dt≤E2,2(α−3)(t0)/(α−3)\int_{t_0}^{\infty} t\|\dot x(t)\|^2\,dt \le \mathcal E_{2,2(\alpha-3)}(t_0)/(\alpha-3)∫t0​∞​t∥x˙(t)∥2dt≤E2,2(α−3)​(t0​)/(α−3).
  7. Lemma A.4: if tw¨+αw˙≤gt\ddot w + \alpha\dot w \le gtw¨+αw˙≤g a.e. with α>1\alpha>1α>1, g≥0g\ge0g≥0 integrable and www bounded below, then [w˙]+[\dot w]_+[w˙]+​ is integrable and lim⁡w(t)\lim w(t)limw(t) exists.
  8. Lemma A.2 (Opial's lemma, continuous form).

Significance

The result. Theorem 2.16 is the first proof that the trajectories of the continuous Nesterov model converge, not only their values. The paper's discrete analysis parallels the continuous one and yields weak convergence of the iterates of Nesterov-type forward–backward algorithms for α>3\alpha>3α>3 (Theorem 5.3, a companion mission). The minimizing property (Theorem 2.3) holds for every α>0\alpha>0α>0, with no minimizer assumed, and shows that a bounded trajectory exists only if Φ\PhiΦ has a minimizer. Strong convergence results under further geometric assumptions (Theorems 3.1–3.3) build directly on Theorem 2.16.

Formalizing it. All statements are proved on paper. None of them, nor the differential equation (1), is formalized on Prove2Me or in Mathlib; the discrete analogue (weak convergence of the unperturbed accelerated forward–backward iterates) exists on the platform as a separate result. A formal development provides: a reusable encoding of solutions of a non-autonomous second-order ODE in a Hilbert space; Lyapunov arguments with one-sided derivatives on a half-line; a continuous-time Opial lemma, which is the standard tool for weak convergence of evolution equations and of semigroups; and the scalar differential-inequality lemma A.4.

Difficulty

Lyapunov functions such as WWW or Eα−1,0\mathcal E_{\alpha-1,0}Eα−1,0​ give rates on the values but not convergence of x(t)x(t)x(t): a decreasing energy says nothing about where the trajectory goes, and the minimizer set may be a continuum. The natural first idea, showing that ∥x(t)−x∗∥\|x(t)-x^*\|∥x(t)−x∗∥ is eventually monotone as for the gradient flow, fails: the inertial term makes hx∗h_{x^*}hx∗​ oscillate, and (7) controls only th¨+αh˙t\ddot h + \alpha\dot hth¨+αh˙, a second-order quantity. Making it usable requires integrability of t∥x˙(t)∥2t\|\dot x(t)\|^2t∥x˙(t)∥2 on [t0,+∞[[t_0,+\infty[[t0​,+∞[, which is not available from the Su–Boyd–Candès energy and holds only for α>3\alpha>3α>3; the borderline α=3\alpha=3α=3 is open. In infinite dimension, convergence is genuinely weak: bounded sets are not compact, so the argument must identify weak limit points through weak lower semicontinuity of Φ\PhiΦ and conclude through Opial's lemma.

Formalization scope

  • Space. H\mathcal HH is a real inner product space that is complete (InnerProductSpace ℝ H, CompleteSpace H); no finite dimension is assumed, since in finite dimension weak and norm convergence coincide.
  • Potential. Φ:H→R\Phi:\mathcal H\to\mathbb RΦ:H→R with ConvexOn ℝ Set.univ Φ and ContDiff ℝ 1 Φ; ∇Φ\nabla\Phi∇Φ is Mathlib's gradient. Minimizers are points zzz with Φ(z)≤Φ(y)\Phi(z)\le\Phi(y)Φ(z)≤Φ(y) for all yyy; min⁡Φ\min\PhiminΦ is written Φ(x∗)\Phi(x^*)Φ(x∗) for such a point.
  • Solutions. (1) is the first-order system x˙=v\dot x=vx˙=v, v˙=−αtv−∇Φ(x)\dot v=-\frac{\alpha}{t}v-\nabla\Phi(x)v˙=−tα​v−∇Φ(x), with derivatives within [t0,+∞[[t_0,+\infty[[t0​,+∞[ at every t≥t0t\ge t_0t≥t0​ and t0>0t_0>0t0​>0. Existence of solutions is not assumed or proved: every statement concerns a given solution, as in the paper.
  • Limits and integrals. Limits in R∪{−∞}\mathbb R\cup\{-\infty\}R∪{−∞} are taken in EReal, inf⁡Φ\inf\PhiinfΦ as an EReal infimum. Improper integrals ∫t0+∞\int_{t_0}^{+\infty}∫t0​+∞​ carry an explicit integrability conjunct; integrals over [t0,t][t_0,t][t0​,t] are interval integrals of continuous functions.
  • Explicit constants. The constant CCC of Lemma 2.2 and the bounds E2,2(α−3)(t0)/(α−3)\mathcal E_{2,2(\alpha-3)}(t_0)/(\alpha-3)E2,2(α−3)​(t0​)/(α−3) of (13), (15) are stated exactly as the paper computes them.
  • Trivializations ruled out. Weak convergence is not replaced by norm convergence, the derivative relations between xxx, vvv and their energies are part of the hypotheses or conclusions (never a free deriv), and the solution predicate is non-vacuous: the constant trajectory for Φ=0\Phi=0Φ=0 and the explicit solution x(t)=t2x(t)=t^2x(t)=t2 of Example 2.5 satisfy it.
  • Citation. Theorem numbers and pages refer to the Optimization Online preprint 5179 (October 2015), titled "…asymptotic vanishing damping", not to the Mathematical Programming typesetting.

Contributions of reusable infrastructure are welcome, in particular a continuous-time Opial lemma, weak lower semicontinuity of continuous convex functions on a Hilbert space along weakly convergent sequences, and integration-by-parts lemmas for one-sided derivatives on a half-line.

Selected references

  • H. Attouch, Z. Chbani, J. Peypouquet, P. Redont, Fast convergence of inertial dynamics and algorithms with asymptotic vanishing damping, Optimization Online preprint 5179, 2015; published as …vanishing viscosity, Mathematical Programming 168 (2018) 123–175. https://optimization-online.org/wp-content/uploads/2015/10/5179.pdf, https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-016-0992-8
  • W. Su, S. Boyd, E. J. Candès, A differential equation for modeling Nesterov's accelerated gradient method: theory and insights, Journal of Machine Learning Research 17 (2016) 1–43. https://jmlr.org/papers/v17/15-084.html
  • F. Alvarez, On the minimizing property of a second order dissipative system in Hilbert spaces, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 38 (2000) 1102–1119. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0363012998335802
  • Z. Opial, Weak convergence of the sequence of successive approximations for nonexpansive mappings, Bulletin of the AMS 73 (1967) 591–597. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9904-1967-11761-0
  • A. Beck, M. Teboulle, A fast iterative shrinkage-thresholding algorithm for linear inverse problems, SIAM Journal on Imaging Sciences 2 (2009) 183–202. https://doi.org/10.1137/080716542
  • A. Chambolle, Ch. Dossal, On the convergence of the iterates of the "fast iterative shrinkage/thresholding algorithm", Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 166 (2015) 968–982. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10957-015-0746-4
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

First-Order Optimization Algorithms via Inertial Systems with Hessian Driven Damping IV: For µ-Strongly Convex f, (DIN)2√µ,β Trajectories Satisfy f(x(t)) − min f ≤ Ce^{−√µ(t−t₀)/2}Research Paper

Motivation

Accelerated first-order methods for convex minimization, such as Nesterov's method and Polyak's heavy ball method, are now routinely studied through their continuous-time limits: second-order differential equations whose trajectories descend toward a minimizer. In the time-continuous setting the convergence analysis is a Lyapunov argument, and a good Lyapunov function for the ODE usually suggests one for the algorithm obtained by discretizing it.

Attouch, Chbani, Fadili and Riahi (arXiv:1907.10536v2, Math. Program. 2020) study inertial dynamics with Hessian-driven damping: besides the viscous friction term γx˙\gamma\dot xγx˙, the equation contains a term β∇2f(x(t))x˙(t)\beta\nabla^2 f(x(t))\dot x(t)β∇2f(x(t))x˙(t), which equals βddt∇f(x(t))\beta\frac{d}{dt}\nabla f(x(t))βdtd​∇f(x(t)). This damping is known to reduce the oscillations of the heavy ball trajectory, and because it is a time derivative of the gradient, explicit and implicit time discretizations of it produce first-order algorithms with no Hessian evaluation. This mission covers the strongly convex continuous-time result of the paper, Theorem 7 (§4.1, pp. 19–21). For β=0\beta=0β=0 it reduces to the heavy ball equation with friction 2μ2\sqrt\mu2μ​, whose exponential rate is due to Siegel (arXiv:1903.05671, Theorem 2.2), as the paper's Remark 7 records. For β>0\beta>0β>0, Remark 7 points to a result on a related but different dynamical system by Wilson, Recht and Jordan (arXiv:1611.02635, Theorem 1), whose rate is slightly worse. The algorithms (IPAHD-SC) and (IGAHD-SC) of §5 of the paper are the discrete counterparts of this theorem.

Setting

Let H\mathcal HH be a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. Let f:H→Rf:\mathcal H\to\mathbb Rf:H→R be a convex function of class C2\mathcal C^2C2, with gradient ∇f\nabla f∇f and Hessian ∇2f\nabla^2 f∇2f. For μ>0\mu>0μ>0, fff is μ\muμ-strongly convex (Definition 1) if f−μ2∥⋅∥2f-\frac\mu2\|\cdot\|^2f−2μ​∥⋅∥2 is convex. Such an fff is assumed to have a minimizer x⋆x^\starx⋆, and min⁡Hf=f(x⋆)\min_{\mathcal H} f=f(x^\star)minH​f=f(x⋆).

Fix t0>0t_0>0t0​>0 and a real constant β\betaβ. A solution trajectory of

x¨(t)+2μ x˙(t)+β∇2f(x(t))x˙(t)+∇f(x(t))=0(19)\ddot x(t)+2\sqrt{\mu}\,\dot x(t)+\beta\nabla^2 f(x(t))\dot x(t)+\nabla f(x(t))=0 \tag{19}x¨(t)+2μ​x˙(t)+β∇2f(x(t))x˙(t)+∇f(x(t))=0(19)

is a twice differentiable map x:[t0,+∞[→Hx:[t_0,+\infty[\to\mathcal Hx:[t0​,+∞[→H satisfying the equation at every t≥t0t\ge t_0t≥t0​. This is the dynamic (DIN)γ,β(\mathrm{DIN})_{\gamma,\beta}(DIN)γ,β​ of the paper with the constant viscous damping γ=2μ\gamma=2\sqrt\muγ=2μ​.

The proof uses two auxiliary functions. The first is the Lyapunov function

E(t)=f(x(t))−min⁡Hf+12∥μ(x(t)−x⋆)+x˙(t)+β∇f(x(t))∥2.\mathcal E(t)=f(x(t))-\min_{\mathcal H}f+\tfrac12\big\|\sqrt\mu(x(t)-x^\star)+\dot x(t)+\beta\nabla f(x(t))\big\|^2 .E(t)=f(x(t))−Hmin​f+21​​μ​(x(t)−x⋆)+x˙(t)+β∇f(x(t))​2.

The second is Z(t)=2β(f(x(t))−f(x⋆))+μ∥x(t)−x⋆∥2Z(t)=2\beta(f(x(t))-f(x^\star))+\sqrt\mu\|x(t)-x^\star\|^2Z(t)=2β(f(x(t))−f(x⋆))+μ​∥x(t)−x⋆∥2. Both appear in the milestones under the names lyap and Zfun.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7 (p. 19)

Assume 0≤β≤12μ0\le\beta\le\frac1{2\sqrt\mu}0≤β≤2μ​1​. Then three statements hold. First, for all t≥t0t\ge t_0t≥t0​,

μ2∥x(t)−x⋆∥2≤f(x(t))−min⁡Hf≤Ce−μ2(t−t0),C:=f(x(t0))−min⁡Hf+μ∥x(t0)−x⋆∥2+∥x˙(t0)+β∇f(x(t0))∥2.\frac\mu2\|x(t)-x^\star\|^2\le f(x(t))-\min_{\mathcal H}f\le C e^{-\frac{\sqrt\mu}{2}(t-t_0)},\qquad C:=f(x(t_0))-\min_{\mathcal H}f+\mu\|x(t_0)-x^\star\|^2+\|\dot x(t_0)+\beta\nabla f(x(t_0))\|^2 .2μ​∥x(t)−x⋆∥2≤f(x(t))−Hmin​f≤Ce−2μ​​(t−t0​),C:=f(x(t0​))−Hmin​f+μ∥x(t0​)−x⋆∥2+∥x˙(t0​)+β∇f(x(t0​))∥2.

Second, there is C1>0C_1>0C1​>0 such that for all t≥t0t\ge t_0t≥t0​

e−μt∫t0teμs∥∇f(x(s))∥2 ds≤C1e−μ2t.e^{-\sqrt\mu t}\int_{t_0}^t e^{\sqrt\mu s}\|\nabla f(x(s))\|^2\,ds\le C_1e^{-\frac{\sqrt\mu}{2}t}.e−μ​t∫t0​t​eμ​s∥∇f(x(s))∥2ds≤C1​e−2μ​​t.

Third,

∫t0∞eμ2t∥x˙(t)∥2 dt<+∞.\int_{t_0}^\infty e^{\frac{\sqrt\mu}{2}t}\|\dot x(t)\|^2\,dt<+\infty .∫t0​∞​e2μ​​t∥x˙(t)∥2dt<+∞.

Milestones

The milestones are the displayed steps of the paper's proof, in order:

  1. the strong convexity inequality ⟨∇f(y),y−x⋆⟩≥f(y)−f(x⋆)+μ2∥y−x⋆∥2\langle\nabla f(y),y-x^\star\rangle\ge f(y)-f(x^\star)+\frac\mu2\|y-x^\star\|^2⟨∇f(y),y−x⋆⟩≥f(y)−f(x⋆)+2μ​∥y−x⋆∥2;
  2. the first differential inequality for E\mathcal EE;
  3. the nonnegativity of μ4X2+β2μY2−βμXY\frac\mu4X^2+\frac{\beta}{2\sqrt\mu}Y^2-\beta\sqrt\mu XY4μ​X2+2μ​β​Y2−βμ​XY;
  4. ddtE+μ2E+μ2∥x˙∥2≤0\frac{d}{dt}\mathcal E+\frac{\sqrt\mu}2\mathcal E+\frac{\sqrt\mu}2\|\dot x\|^2\le0dtd​E+2μ​​E+2μ​​∥x˙∥2≤0;
  5. E(t)≤E(t0)e−μ2(t−t0)\mathcal E(t)\le\mathcal E(t_0)e^{-\frac{\sqrt\mu}2(t-t_0)}E(t)≤E(t0​)e−2μ​​(t−t0​);
  6. the differential inequality for ZZZ.

Companion: the case β=0\beta=0β=0

The last sentence of Theorem 7 states that for β=0\beta=0β=0, f(x(t))−min⁡f=O(e−μt)f(x(t))-\min f=\mathcal O(e^{-\sqrt\mu t})f(x(t))−minf=O(e−μ​t). The paper gives no proof of it and attributes it to Siegel. It is a separate item, listed as the last milestone, and is not part of the goal.

Significance

Theorem 7 gives exponential decay, at the rate e−μ2te^{-\frac{\sqrt\mu}2 t}e−2μ​​t, of the values and of the distance to the minimizer for the whole range 0≤β≤1/(2μ)0\le\beta\le1/(2\sqrt\mu)0≤β≤1/(2μ​) of Hessian damping. It also gives an averaged exponential decay of ∥∇f(x(t))∥2\|\nabla f(x(t))\|^2∥∇f(x(t))∥2, which the authors describe as new in the literature, and weighted integrability of the squared velocity. These estimates guide the design of the strongly convex algorithms of §5, whose linear rates q=1/(1+12μs)q=1/(1+\frac12\sqrt{\mu s})q=1/(1+21​μs​) mirror the continuous rate.

Formalizing it builds machine-checked continuous-time Lyapunov arguments in a Hilbert space: differentiation of energy functions along a trajectory that is only one-sidedly differentiable at t0t_0t0​, the chain rule through ∇f\nabla f∇f (the Hessian term), and Grönwall-type integration of differential inequalities. To our knowledge none of Theorem 7 has a machine-checked proof; the paper's proof is complete apart from the gap at β=0\beta=0β=0 in part (ii) noted under Difficulty.

Difficulty

The algebra of the first differential inequality is a direct but long expansion, and the quadratic form is where the upper bound on β\betaβ enters. The main analytic steps are elsewhere. First, the energy must be shown differentiable along the trajectory, which requires the derivative of t↦∇f(x(t))t\mapsto\nabla f(x(t))t↦∇f(x(t)), a chain rule through the Fréchet derivative of the gradient. Second, the differential inequalities must be integrated on [t0,+∞[[t_0,+\infty[[t0​,+∞[ with one-sided derivatives at t0t_0t0​. Third, part (ii) must be derived from the ZZZ-inequality. The paper's derivation divides by β2\beta^2β2, so it covers only β>0\beta>0β>0. At β=0\beta=0β=0 part (ii) is still true, but it needs a separate argument, for example local Lipschitz continuity of ∇f\nabla f∇f near x⋆x^\starx⋆ together with the convergence x(t)→x⋆x(t)\to x^\starx(t)→x⋆ from part (i). A proof that only follows the printed text does not cover the case β=0\beta = 0β=0.

Formalization scope

  • Space and function. H\mathcal HH is a real inner product space that is complete. fff is ConvexOn ℝ univ and ContDiff ℝ 2, ∇f\nabla f∇f is Mathlib's gradient f, and the Hessian applied to vvv at xxx is fderiv ℝ (gradient f) x v.
  • Strong convexity is Definition 1 verbatim, with μ>0\mu>0μ>0 as a separate hypothesis. Convexity of fff is kept from the standing hypothesis (H) of p. 2 even though strong convexity implies it.
  • The minimizer. argmin⁡f≠∅\operatorname{argmin}f\neq\emptysetargminf=∅ is a point xstar with f(x⋆)≤f(y)f(x^\star)\le f(y)f(x⋆)≤f(y) for all yyy. min⁡f\min fminf is written f xstar.
  • The trajectory is a triple x,x˙,x¨:R→Hx,\dot x,\ddot x:\mathbb R\to\mathcal Hx,x˙,x¨:R→H. At every t≥t0t\ge t_0t≥t0​, xxx has derivative x˙(t)\dot x(t)x˙(t) and x˙\dot xx˙ has derivative x¨(t)\ddot x(t)x¨(t) within [t0,+∞[[t_0,+\infty[[t0​,+∞[, and (19) holds. Values before t0t_0t0​ play no role, and x˙(t0)\dot x(t_0)x˙(t0​) in the constant CCC is the right derivative. β\betaβ is a real constant and t0>0t_0>0t0​>0, as in (H).
  • Derivatives in milestones are stated as the existence of a number that is the one-sided derivative and satisfies the inequality. Such a number is unique.
  • Integrals. Part (ii) is an interval integral of a function continuous on [t0,t][t_0,t][t0​,t]. The "Moreover" clause is stated as integrability on [t0,+∞[[t_0,+\infty[[t0​,+∞[ of the nonnegative integrand. The constant C1C_1C1​ is existentially quantified after the trajectory, so it may depend on it, as on the page.
  • Ruling out trivial readings. The goal never mentions E\mathcal EE or ZZZ: its conclusions are about f(x(t))f(x(t))f(x(t)), ∥x(t)−x⋆∥\|x(t)-x^\star\|∥x(t)−x⋆∥, ∇f(x(t))\nabla f(x(t))∇f(x(t)) and x˙(t)\dot x(t)x˙(t) only. The solution predicate is satisfiable: the constant trajectory at x⋆x^\starx⋆ satisfies it.
  • Infrastructure needed: the chain rule for ∇f∘x\nabla f\circ x∇f∘x with one-sided derivatives, differentiation of ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|^2∥⋅∥2 and ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ along curves, and a Grönwall-type lemma u′≤−cu⇒u(t)≤u(t0)e−c(t−t0)u'\le-cu\Rightarrow u(t)\le u(t_0)e^{-c(t-t_0)}u′≤−cu⇒u(t)≤u(t0​)e−c(t−t0​) on [t0,∞)[t_0,\infty)[t0​,∞) with one-sided derivatives. These are reusable for the other continuous-time missions of the series. Contributions of these general lemmas are welcome as separate theorems.

Selected references

  • H. Attouch, Z. Chbani, J. Fadili, H. Riahi, First-order optimization algorithms via inertial systems with Hessian driven damping, Math. Program. (2020); arXiv:1907.10536v2. https://arxiv.org/abs/1907.10536
  • J. W. Siegel, Accelerated first-order methods: differential equations and Lyapunov functions, 2019. https://arxiv.org/abs/1903.05671
  • A. C. Wilson, B. Recht, M. I. Jordan, A Lyapunov analysis of momentum methods in optimization, J. Mach. Learn. Res. 22 (2021); arXiv:1611.02635. https://arxiv.org/abs/1611.02635
  • B. T. Polyak, Some methods of speeding up the convergence of iteration methods, USSR Comput. Math. Math. Phys. 4 (1964). https://doi.org/10.1016/0041-5553(64)90137-5
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Control TheoryOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamic Instabilities and Stabilization Methods in Distributed Real-Time Scheduling of Manufacturing Systems 3: Clear-a-Fraction Policies Are Stable From Every Initial State When ρ′ₘ < 1Research Paper

Motivation

A flexible manufacturing system processes several part types on shared machines, and a machine that switches from one part type to another pays a set-up time. Real-time, distributed scheduling rules for such systems decide locally, at each machine, when to switch and to which buffer. The simplest such rules are clearing policies: a machine keeps working on its current buffer until that buffer is empty, then switches. Perkins and Kumar (IEEE TAC 34, 1989; reference [18] of Kumar–Seidman 1990) showed that every clear-a-fraction (CAF) policy, a clearing policy that always switches to a buffer holding at least a fixed fraction of the machine's work, keeps all buffers bounded in every acyclic system whenever each machine's load is below one.

Kumar and Seidman (IEEE TAC 1990) showed that acyclicity cannot simply be dropped. In §III of the paper, a two-machine re-entrant line and a two-part-type system, both with every machine loaded below capacity, have clearing trajectories whose buffer levels grow without bound. This mission formalizes the paper's positive result for non-acyclic systems: Theorem 1, a stronger capacity condition under which every CAF policy is stable from every initial state.

Setting

There are PPP part types and MMM machines. Part type ppp enters at rate dp>0d_p>0dp​>0 and visits the machines μp,1,…,μp,np\mu_{p,1},\dots,\mu_{p,n_p}μp,1​,…,μp,np​​ in turn; revisits are allowed. At its iii-th stage a part waits in buffer bp,ib_{p,i}bp,i​ and needs processing time τp,i>0\tau_{p,i}>0τp,i​>0. Machine mmm serves Bm={bp,i:μp,i=m}B_m=\{b_{p,i}:\mu_{p,i}=m\}Bm​={bp,i​:μp,i​=m}, and switching from bbb to b′∈Bmb'\in B_mb′∈Bm​ costs δb,b′≥0\delta_{b,b'}\ge0δb,b′​≥0. Flows are fluid. The level xb(t)≥0x_b(t)\ge0xb​(t)≥0 satisfies xb(t)=xb(0)+ub(t)−yb(t)x_b(t)=x_b(0)+u_b(t)-y_b(t)xb​(t)=xb​(0)+ub​(t)−yb​(t), where yby_byb​ is the cumulative output and ubu_bub​ the cumulative input: dptd_p tdp​t for the first buffer of a route, the output of the previous buffer otherwise. Each machine works through runs. A run is a set-up for a buffer, during which nothing is processed, followed by processing of that buffer at rate at most 1/τb1/\tau_b1/τb​, and at exactly that rate while the buffer is nonempty.

A trajectory is clearing (Definition 1) if each machine leaves its buffer exactly at the first time the buffer is empty while another of its buffers is nonempty, and then sets up for such a buffer. It is CAF with constants εm>0\varepsilon_m>0εm​>0, KmK_mKm​ (Definition 2) if every set-up commenced at time ttt is for a buffer with

xp,i(t) ≥ εm∑(q,j): μq,j=mxq,j(t)−Km.x_{p,i}(t)\ \ge\ \varepsilon_m\sum_{(q,j):\,\mu_{q,j}=m}x_{q,j}(t)-K_m .xp,i​(t) ≥ εm​(q,j):μq,j​=m∑​xq,j​(t)−Km​.

A trajectory is stable if sup⁡t≥0xp,i(t)<∞\sup_{t\ge0}x_{p,i}(t)<\inftysupt≥0​xp,i​(t)<∞ for every buffer.

The graph on machines has an arc m→m′m\to m'm→m′ when m≠m′m\ne m'm=m′ and some part type visits m′m'm′ right after mmm. Machines are diconnected, m↔m′m\leftrightarrow m'm↔m′, when each is reachable from the other. For each buffer, λp,i\lambda_{p,i}λp,i​ is the last earlier stage at a different machine, if any, and πp,i\pi_{p,i}πp,i​ is that stage's machine, the prior machine. The modified input rate is dp,i′=1/τp,λp,id'_{p,i}=1/\tau_{p,\lambda_{p,i}}dp,i′​=1/τp,λp,i​​ if πp,i↔μp,i\pi_{p,i}\leftrightarrow\mu_{p,i}πp,i​↔μp,i​, and dp,i′=dpd'_{p,i}=d_pdp,i′​=dp​ otherwise (11)–(13).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 294)

If

ρm′:=∑(p,i): μp,i=mdp,i′ τp,i<1for all m,(14)\rho'_m:=\sum_{(p,i):\,\mu_{p,i}=m}d'_{p,i}\,\tau_{p,i}<1\qquad\text{for all } m, \tag{14}ρm′​:=(p,i):μp,i​=m∑​dp,i′​τp,i​<1for all m,(14)

then for all ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, all KKK, every CAF trajectory from every initial state is stable. The bound on each buffer may depend on the trajectory.

Milestones (the proof's own steps, p. 295)

For a machine mmm in a minimal class, Vm(t)=∑μp,i=mxp,i(t)[τp,i+⋯+τp,i+ηp,i−1]V_m(t)=\sum_{\mu_{p,i}=m}x_{p,i}(t)[\tau_{p,i}+\dots+\tau_{p,i+\eta_{p,i}-1}]Vm​(t)=∑μp,i​=m​xp,i​(t)[τp,i​+⋯+τp,i+ηp,i​−1​] is the work at mmm (15), and Tn,Tn+1T_n, T_{n+1}Tn​,Tn+1​ are consecutive set-up commencements:

  1. (18): Vm(Tn+1)≤max⁡[0,Vm(Tn)−(1−ρm′)(Tn+1−Tn)+δˉ]V_m(T_{n+1})\le\max[0,V_m(T_n)-(1-\rho'_m)(T_{n+1}-T_n)+\bar\delta]Vm​(Tn+1​)≤max[0,Vm​(Tn​)−(1−ρm′​)(Tn+1​−Tn​)+δˉ].
  2. (20): xpn∗,in∗(Tn)≥2δˉ/((1−ρm′)τpn∗,in∗)⇒Tn+1−Tn≥2δˉ/(1−ρm′)x_{p^*_n,i^*_n}(T_n)\ge 2\bar\delta/((1-\rho'_m)\tau_{p^*_n,i^*_n})\Rightarrow T_{n+1}-T_n\ge2\bar\delta/(1-\rho'_m)xpn∗​,in∗​​(Tn​)≥2δˉ/((1−ρm′​)τpn∗​,in∗​​)⇒Tn+1​−Tn​≥2δˉ/(1−ρm′​).
  3. Vm(Tn)≥Γm⇒Vm(Tn+1)≤Vm(Tn)−δˉV_m(T_n)\ge\Gamma_m\Rightarrow V_m(T_{n+1})\le V_m(T_n)-\bar\deltaVm​(Tn​)≥Γm​⇒Vm​(Tn+1​)≤Vm​(Tn​)−δˉ, with the explicit Γm\Gamma_mΓm​ of p. 295.
  4. Every buffer of every machine in a minimal class is bounded.
  5. The induction step: with upstream classes bounded, Vm(Tn+1)≤max⁡{Γˉ,Vm(Tn)−(1−ρm′)(Tn+1−Tn)+δˉ+Γˉ}V_m(T_{n+1})\le\max\{\bar\Gamma,V_m(T_n)-(1-\rho'_m)(T_{n+1}-T_n)+\bar\delta+\bar\Gamma\}Vm​(Tn+1​)≤max{Γˉ,Vm​(Tn​)−(1−ρm′​)(Tn+1​−Tn​)+δˉ+Γˉ}.

Significance

The result. Theorem 1 is a sufficient condition for stability that holds for every system topology and every CAF policy, with no restriction to acyclic flows. It separates two kinds of upstream supply. A machine that is not in a common cycle with its supplier needs capacity only for the average rate dpd_pdp​. A machine that is in such a cycle must budget for the supplier's peak rate. The paper's examples show that some strengthening of ρm<1\rho_m<1ρm​<1 is needed for clearing policies on cyclic systems: they are unstable under ρm<1\rho_m<1ρm​<1 alone. Section V of the paper builds on this gap, with a supervisory mechanism that restores stability under ρm<1\rho_m<1ρm​<1 alone.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; no machine-checked proof exists. A formalization must turn a two-page argument with a set-up/processing run structure, a starvation case analysis and an induction over the condensation of a directed graph into rigorous statements. The result is a reusable fluid model of scheduling with set-up times. It also makes explicit the conventions of the clearing rule, which the paper leaves informal.

Difficulty

A natural first attempt bounds the total work VmV_mVm​ at each machine separately, using only the average arrival rates. This fails on cyclic systems. A machine downstream in a cycle can receive parts in bursts at the upstream machine's full processing rate 1/τ1/\tau1/τ, far above dpd_pdp​; Example 1 of the paper builds exactly such a positive feedback. The proof therefore has to (a) bound the inflow into a machine of a minimal class by the peak rates in (14); (b) handle starvation inside a run, where the machine works below its maximal rate; (c) control the set-up overhead, which the CAF rule amortizes by forcing long runs once VmV_mVm​ is large; and (d) push boundedness down the partial order of classes, where the bounded upstream buffers enter as an additive constant Γˉ\bar\GammaΓˉ. Step (d) needs a bound on the total content upstream, not one per buffer.

Formalization scope

  • Model. System P M holds the data. Part types, machines and stages are 0-based (paper stage iii is Lean stage i−1i-1i−1). Trajectory S holds levels, cumulative outputs and runs, with N m : ℕ∞ runs per machine. Time is real, with explicit t≥0t\ge0t≥0. Run starts are nondecreasing and, if infinitely many, tend to infinity. Machines never idle outside runs: idling on an empty buffer is processing at the inflow rate.
  • Processing law. The output is bounded by 1/τb1/\tau_b1/τb​ times the Lebesgue measure of the time spent processing bbb, with equality on intervals of processing of a nonempty buffer.
  • Clearing. "Nonempty" in Definition 1 for the buffer switched to is read as nonempty or with inflow starting now. Under this reading the paper's example trajectories are clearing trajectories; read literally, "the first time" would not exist. The emptiness test on the current buffer is literal. The no-early-exit condition holds on the open processing interval.
  • Set-ups. Set-ups occur only between distinct buffers. δˉ\bar\deltaδˉ is the largest set-up time between distinct buffers of mmm, or 000 if there are none. Zero set-up times are allowed; δˉ>0\bar\delta>0δˉ>0 is not assumed.
  • Constants. Γm\Gamma_mΓm​, τˉ\bar\tauτˉ, τ‾\underline\tauτ​, Γˉ\bar\GammaΓˉ are explicit definitions, never existentials. Every denominator is positive under the hypotheses.
  • Trivializations ruled out. The trajectory class is not empty: a sorry-free witness (one machine, one buffer, dτ<1d\tau<1dτ<1, any initial level) satisfies every predicate, together with (14). The goal quantifies over every system, every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 and KKK, and every CAF trajectory. It does not fix a selection rule, an acyclic topology, routes without revisits or positive set-ups.
  • Infrastructure. Continuity of the levels (from the rate cap), restarting a trajectory at a run start, inflow bounds via conservation along routes, and the condensation of the machine graph. These are reusable for the related Kumar–Seidman missions on instability and supervisory stabilization. Proofs of the milestones in any order are welcome.

Selected references

  • P. R. Kumar and T. I. Seidman, Dynamic instabilities and stabilization methods in distributed real-time scheduling of manufacturing systems, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 35(3), 289–298, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.50339
  • J. R. Perkins and P. R. Kumar, Stable, distributed, real-time scheduling of flexible manufacturing/assembly/disassembly systems, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 34, 139–148, February 1989 (cited as [18] in Kumar–Seidman 1990; the CAF stability result for acyclic systems).
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Subadditive Ergodic Theory 1: Kingman's Theorem — x₀ₜ/t Converges with Probability One and in Mean to a Finite ξ with E(ξ) = γResearch Paper

Motivation

Many stochastic systems have an accumulated cost or passage time that grows with the length of an observation window. Splitting a window at an intermediate time gives an upper bound on the total, even when it does not give an equality. First-passage percolation and products of random matrices are examples discussed by Kingman (1973). A central question is whether the cost per unit time settles to a long-run rate on almost every sample path.

Hammersley and Welsh introduced subadditive stochastic processes in 1965. Kingman's 1968 theorem established the almost-sure limit for the stationary process considered here. His 1973 paper restated the result, identified the limit's expectation, and set out the process model and related formulations used in later applications. The 1973 article explicitly attributes the proof of Theorem 1, its maximal inequality, and its decomposition to the 1968 work; this mission formalizes the statements as presented in the 1973 paper.

Setting

Fix a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P). For integers 0≤s<t0\le s<t0≤s<t, let xst:Ω→Rx_{st}:\Omega\to\mathbb Rxst​:Ω→R be a measurable random variable. Think of xstx_{st}xst​ as the accumulated quantity over the interval from sss to ttt. Condition S₁ is subadditivity: xsu≤xst+xtux_{su}\le x_{st}+x_{tu}xsu​≤xst​+xtu​ whenever s<t<us<t<us<t<u. The stronger equality defines an additive process.

Condition S₂ says that shifting every interval one time unit forward leaves the joint distribution of the whole family unchanged. It concerns the law of (xs+1,t+1)s<t(x_{s+1,t+1})_{s<t}(xs+1,t+1​)s<t​ as a single countable path. The one-dimensional statement that each xstx_{st}xst​ has a distribution depending only on t−st-st−s is called S₂′ in the paper; it does not replace S₂. Condition S₃ says that every positive-time variable x0tx_{0t}x0t​ is integrable and that, for some real AAA, its mean gt=EP(x0t)g_t=E_P(x_{0t})gt​=EP​(x0t​) satisfies gt≥−Atg_t\ge-Atgt​≥−At for all t≥1t\ge1t≥1. A subadditive process satisfies S₁, S₂, and S₃.

The associated mean growth rate is γ(x)=inf⁡t≥1gt/t\gamma(x)=\inf_{t\ge1}g_t/tγ(x)=inft≥1​gt​/t. The time index starts at one in this infimum because division by zero would introduce an unrelated value. S₃ gives a finite lower bound; the subadditive mean relation makes this infimum the limit of gt/tg_t/tgt​/t. Kingman also considers the invariant σ-field I\mathcal II: events determined by the entire path and unchanged by the shift (xst)↦(xs+1,t+1)(x_{st})\mapsto(x_{s+1,t+1})(xst​)↦(xs+1,t+1​). It records the part of the process that can remain random in the limiting rate. Source: §§1.1–1.2, pp. 883–885.

Formalization targets

Theorem 1: finite long-run rate

For every subadditive process there is an integrable real random variable ξ\xiξ such that

x0t(ω)t⟶ξ(ω)for P-almost every ω,∫Ω∣x0tt−ξ∣ dP⟶0,EP(ξ)=γ(x).\frac{x_{0t}(\omega)}{t}\longrightarrow\xi(\omega) \quad\text{for }P\text{-almost every }\omega, \qquad \int_\Omega\left|\frac{x_{0t}}{t}-\xi\right|\,dP\longrightarrow0, \qquad E_P(\xi)=\gamma(x).tx0t​(ω)​⟶ξ(ω)for P-almost every ω,∫Ω​​tx0t​​−ξ​dP⟶0,EP​(ξ)=γ(x).

These are three distinct claims: almost-sure convergence, convergence in mean, and an identity for the limit's expectation. The limit need not be a constant. The milestone list also covers the convergence of the means, the maximal inequality (1.2.5), the decomposition (1.2.6), the measure-preserving formulation (1.3.4)–(1.3.5), and the representation through I\mathcal II in (1.2.4). Each statement comes from the 1973 paper, §§1.1–1.3.

Measure-preserving formulation

For a measure-preserving map θ:Ω→Ω\theta:\Omega\to\Omegaθ:Ω→Ω, condition Sᴱ concerns integrable functions fnf_nfn​ with fm+n(ω)≤fm(ω)+fn(θmω)f_{m+n}(\omega)\le f_m(\omega)+f_n(\theta^m\omega)fm+n​(ω)≤fm​(ω)+fn​(θmω) for m,n≥1m,n\ge1m,n≥1 and a linear lower bound on their expectations. It yields an integrable ξ\xiξ with fn/n→ξf_n/n\to\xifn​/n→ξ almost surely and in mean. Neither invertibility nor ergodicity of θ\thetaθ is assumed. Source: §1.3, p. 886.

Significance

The theorem assigns a finite sample-path growth rate to an entire class of stationary subadditive systems. It also ties the average of that rate to the infimum of the normalized expected values. The equality is useful when a system's finite-window means are easier to estimate than its individual long-run paths. The invariant σ-field statement explains why a stationary system can have different rates on different paths without contradicting the mean identity. Kingman's examples show how the same framework reaches percolation and matrix products.

The result is mathematically proved, as the 1973 article states. The remaining work here is a machine-checked development of its process model and the displayed results. A published Prove2Me item, PalmQueueing.Ergodic.kingman_subadditive, is open and concerns an ergodic bijective flow with a constant possibly infinite limit; it does not supply this nonergodic finite-limit theorem or convergence in mean. The draft statements in this mission compile with proof placeholders. No machine-checked proof of these new statements is claimed.

Difficulty

Subadditivity gives bounds when intervals are joined, but it does not express x0tx_{0t}x0t​ as a sum of identically distributed increments. The ordinary additive ergodic theorem therefore does not immediately give convergence for x0t/tx_{0t}/tx0t​/t. Nor does convergence of the expectations gt/tg_t/tgt​/t alone force convergence on individual paths or in mean. The process may also have a nonconstant limit: stationarity is a joint-law condition, not an ergodicity assumption that erases invariant information. These are the gaps the formalization must close without strengthening the hypotheses. Source: §§1.1–1.3.

Formalization scope

Lean represents xxx as a function of two natural-number indices and a sample point, but every condition and conclusion uses only s<ts<ts<t. S₁ and the Sᴱ cocycle inequality follow the paper's pointwise displays; random-variable equality in the decomposition is stated almost surely at each valid index pair. Measurability of each valid coordinate is explicit. S₂ compares two probability measures on the full countable path space, so equality of individual marginals cannot satisfy it. The probability measure is normalized, and S₃ requires Bochner integrability to keep every mean finite. The constant γ\gammaγ is a real infimum over positive times, used only under S₃. The goal's limit is real and integrable; Kingman's separate Theorem 2 treats a possible value of −∞-\infty−∞ and belongs to another mission.

The invariant σ-field is the pullback of the path-space shift-invariant σ-field. Its measurability claim is made through an almost-everywhere equal version, since almost-sure limits are insensitive to changes on null sets. Conditional expectation uses this explicit sub-σ-field. All limits in this mission take positive integer time to infinity. The Sᴱ definition requires measure preservation but no inverse and no ergodicity. Thus neither a marginal-law substitution for S₂ nor an ergodic constant-limit specialization can trivialize the target.

A complete proof can reuse Mathlib's measure theory, conditional expectation, product measurable spaces, measure-preserving maps, and subadditive-sequence results. The two process definitions, the invariant σ-field interface, and auxiliary statements are useful to later formalizations of stationary growth models. Contributions that prove the stated results or develop general-purpose lemmas for these objects fit the mission.

Selected references

  • J. F. C. Kingman, Subadditive ergodic theory, The Annals of Probability 1(6), 883–899, 1973. DOI: 10.1214/aop/1176996798.
8 thms3 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Stability and Instability of Fluid Models for Reentrant Lines 4: The Lu–Kumar Network Has an Unstable Work-Conserving Fluid Model iff m₂ + m₄ ≥ 1Research Paper

Motivation

A reentrant line is a queueing network in which every customer follows one fixed route but may return to a station after visiting another one. A manufacturing line can have this pattern when a product revisits the same machine at different processing stages. A station can then have little nominal workload and still face unstable queues under an unfortunate service order. Dai and Weiss studied this gap between nominal capacity and fluid stability for reentrant lines in their 1996 paper. The four-class line associated with Lu and Kumar is their sharp example: its behavior changes at a simple cross-station inequality that is different from either station's ordinary workload constraint.

The paper establishes several positive stability results for other disciplines and networks, then gives an exact boundary for the Lu–Kumar line. Here the exact boundary is the focus. The result concerns fluid models, deterministic large-scale approximations of queue trajectories. It does not assert positive Harris recurrence or transience of the underlying stochastic network in both directions. The paper cites Dai's earlier implication from a stable fluid model to a stable stochastic discipline, but the converse was still open in its concluding discussion (Dai and Weiss 1996, pp. 119 and 133).

Setting

There are four customer classes, encountered in order 1→2→3→41\to2\to3\to41→2→3→4. Classes 111 and 444 use station 111; classes 222 and 333 use station 222. Each class kkk has a positive mean service time mkm_kmk​ and service rate μk=1/mk\mu_k=1/m_kμk​=1/mk​. The external arrival rate is normalized to one. The nominal workloads are ρ1=m1+m4\rho_1=m_1+m_4ρ1​=m1​+m4​ and ρ2=m2+m3\rho_2=m_2+m_3ρ2​=m2​+m3​, both assumed strictly below one. These assumptions say that each station has enough average capacity for its own stages, but they leave the scheduling decision unresolved.

At time ttt, Qk(t)≥0Q_k(t)\ge0Qk​(t)≥0 is the amount of class-kkk fluid, and Tk(t)T_k(t)Tk​(t) is the cumulative service time devoted to that class. The fluid equations balance the inflow and outflow of each class. Outside fluid enters class 111 at unit rate; completion of class kkk feeds class k+1k+1k+1 until class 444 exits. Service times and idle times are nondecreasing, and a station's idle time can increase only when its total queue content is zero. A pair (Q,T)(Q,T)(Q,T) with these properties is a work-conserving fluid solution.

The Lu–Kumar priority discipline gives class 444 priority over class 111 at station 111, and class 222 priority over class 333 at station 222. Its fluid model adds the priority complementarity condition: service capacity available to a priority prefix can be unused only when that prefix has no immediate workload. For either model, fluid stability means that some common time δ>0\delta>0δ>0 empties every admissible solution with ∑kQk(0)=1\sum_kQ_k(0)=1∑k​Qk​(0)=1, with all queues remaining zero for t≥δt\ge\deltat≥δ. Instability is the negation of this statement; it does not require every solution to diverge.

Formalization targets

Exact threshold

Theorem 5.1 and Remark 1 give two connected classifications, under mk>0m_k>0mk​>0, ρ1<1\rho_1<1ρ1​<1, and ρ2<1\rho_2<1ρ2​<1:

¬FluidStable⁡(all work-conserving solutions)⟺m2+m4≥1,\neg\operatorname{FluidStable}(\text{all work-conserving solutions}) \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad m_2+m_4\ge1,¬FluidStable(all work-conserving solutions)⟺m2​+m4​≥1, ¬FluidStable⁡(Lu–Kumar priority solutions)⟺m2+m4≥1.\neg\operatorname{FluidStable}(\text{Lu–Kumar priority solutions}) \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad m_2+m_4\ge1.¬FluidStable(Lu–Kumar priority solutions)⟺m2​+m4​≥1.

The first clause captures the paper's existence of an unstable work-conserving policy: on the unstable side, the named priority discipline supplies one; on the other side, every work-conserving fluid model is stable. The second clause records the particular policy classification stated in Remark 1. Equality belongs to the unstable side: the paper exhibits a periodic nonempty solution there (Dai and Weiss 1996, pp. 125–127).

Supporting targets

The milestones follow the paper's own statements and proof claims. The real-analysis extinction criterion of Lemma 2.2(ii) and the maximum-of-components criterion of Lemma 3.2 provide the stability language. Display (3.2), already available as a proved platform theorem, identifies the derivative of an attained maximum at a regular point. The priority condition (4.4) implies the ordinary work-conserving condition (1.13). The unstable half records one first cycle, one solution with every scaled cycle, and instability of the priority model. The stable half records the authors' explicit parameter choice, the two linear Lyapunov conditions, and stability of every work-conserving fluid solution.

Significance

The threshold says that the two station-load inequalities alone do not characterize stability of all work-conserving service orders. The extra inequality m2+m4<1m_2+m_4<1m2​+m4​<1 determines when the entire work-conserving fluid class is stable; its failure admits a concrete priority discipline with a nonempty trajectory. At the boundary m2+m4=1m_2+m_4=1m2​+m4​=1, growth need not be strict: periodic fluid behavior already defeats finite-time stability. The result therefore distinguishes the paper's global stability region from the larger parameter region in which both stations are nominally underloaded (Dai and Weiss 1996, Remark 1, p. 125).

A machine-checked development would give reusable definitions for a four-stage reentrant fluid model, its priority complementarity condition, and the precise unit-initial-state notion of stability. The local Lean statements in this proposal compile, but their proofs remain open. The published maximum-derivative fact is the one already proved platform component used by this mission. The other milestones identify the mathematical work needed to formalize the known 1996 result, rather than presenting the result as a new open conjecture.

Difficulty

The ordinary load test ρi<1\rho_i<1ρi​<1 controls how much service each station needs on average, but it does not control which class receives service when several buffers at a station are nonempty. In the Lu–Kumar priority discipline, serving a high-priority downstream class changes the future arrival pattern seen by the other station. Thus a direct argument from ρ1<1\rho_1<1ρ1​<1 and ρ2<1\rho_2<1ρ2​<1 to queue extinction fails. On the stable side, checking a single station's workload is also insufficient: its content may fall while earlier-stage fluid continues to feed it. The paper formulates two linear components and a finite maximum; the challenge is to obtain a uniform negative drift whenever that maximum is positive, including times when one station is empty and the other determines the active component (Dai and Weiss 1996, pp. 126–128).

Formalization scope

Classes and stations are Fin 4 and Fin 2, with zero-based Lean indices: paper class kkk is Lean index k−1k-1k−1. The fixed station map is (0,1,1,0)(0,1,1,0)(0,1,1,0). Service times remain real parameters with explicit positivity hypotheses. Paths are total functions of real time, while equations and conclusions apply only on t≥0t\ge0t≥0. The external arrival rate is one, and initial size is the sum ∑kQk(0)\sum_kQ_k(0)∑k​Qk​(0), since class contents are nonnegative. The nominal-load assumptions are the two strict inequalities in (5.1). The named priority ranking is a permutation; it encodes only the station-local comparisons that matter.

Conditions (1.13) and (4.4), printed as complementarity or “increases only when empty,” use an equivalent interval-constancy condition in Lean. No extra Lipschitz or continuity assumption is placed on solutions: the fluid equations and monotone capacity constraints are intended to supply that regularity. Derivatives at regular points are represented with HasDerivAt. Lemma 2.2(ii) uses the non-strict bound g˙≤−ε\dot g\le-\varepsilong˙​≤−ε, the version used by the paper's applications, although its displayed hypothesis prints g˙<−ε\dot g<-\varepsilong˙​<−ε. The p. 127 line involving G1G_1G1​ prints (1−θ2)Q4(1-\theta_2)Q_4(1−θ2​)Q4​; (5.3) fixes the intended coefficient as (1−θ1)Q4(1-\theta_1)Q_4(1−θ1​)Q4​.

The goal uses Definition 1.3 exactly: one uniform emptying time for all solutions of unit initial content. An impossible solution predicate, or an instability claim that only asks for a nonzero state at time zero, would not represent the paper's theorem. The mission needs finite-index sum and maximum infrastructure, absolute continuity and almost-everywhere differentiation on nonnegative time, plus elementary algebra of service rates and the cycle scaling. These components can be reused in later fluid-network missions. Contributions that preserve the source's hypotheses and boundary case are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. G. Dai and G. Weiss, Stability and instability of fluid models for reentrant lines, Mathematics of Operations Research 21(1), 115–134, 1996. DOI: 10.1287/moor.21.1.115.
14 thms3 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Stability and Instability of Fluid Models for Reentrant Lines 5: Without Immediate Feedback, Every Work-Conserving Fluid Model of a Two-Station Kelly-Type Line Is StableResearch Paper

Motivation

A multiclass queueing network can be unstable even when every station has enough capacity on average: the queue lengths grow without bound although each server's nominal load is below one. Kumar and Seidman, Lu and Kumar (1991) and Rybko and Stolyar (1992) exhibited such networks under simple priority disciplines. This raised the question of which networks are stable under every reasonable policy, and which policies are stable in every network. Dai (1995) reduced the stability of a queueing network to the stability of its deterministic fluid model, so that the question becomes one about solutions of a system of linear equations and inequalities.

Dai and Weiss (1996) use this reduction to study reentrant lines, the model of semiconductor wafer fabrication in which a single route visits the same machines many times. Section 6 of their paper treats Kelly-type lines, in which every visit to a station has the same mean service time. Kelly (1979) showed that such networks with exponential service times are stable under FIFO and have a product-form stationary distribution. Theorem 6.1 shows that with two stations, and a route that never visits the same station twice in a row, stability holds under every work-conserving policy, not only FIFO. This mission formalizes that theorem.

Setting

A reentrant line has stations 1,…,I1,\dots,I1,…,I and classes 1,…,K1,\dots,K1,…,K. Fluid enters class 111 at rate 111, moves from class kkk to class k+1k+1k+1 on service, and leaves after class KKK. Class kkk is served at station σ(k)\sigma(k)σ(k) with mean service time mk>0m_k > 0mk​>0 and rate μk=1/mk\mu_k = 1/m_kμk​=1/mk​. The constituency of station iii is Ci={k:σ(k)=i}C_i = \{k : \sigma(k) = i\}Ci​={k:σ(k)=i} and its nominal workload is ρi=∑k∈Cimk\rho_i = \sum_{k\in C_i} m_kρi​=∑k∈Ci​​mk​. The traffic condition (1.7) is ρi<1\rho_i < 1ρi​<1 for every iii.

A fluid model solution is a pair (Q,T)(Q, T)(Q,T): Qk(t)≥0Q_k(t) \ge 0Qk​(t)≥0 is the fluid in class kkk at time ttt and Tk(t)T_k(t)Tk​(t) the cumulative service time given to class kkk by time ttt. They satisfy, for t≥0t \ge 0t≥0,

Qk(t)=Qk(0)+μk−1Tk−1(t)−μkTk(t)(μ0T0(t)=t),Q_k(t) = Q_k(0) + \mu_{k-1}T_{k-1}(t) - \mu_k T_k(t) \quad (\mu_0 T_0(t) = t),Qk​(t)=Qk​(0)+μk−1​Tk−1​(t)−μk​Tk​(t)(μ0​T0​(t)=t),

Tk(0)=0T_k(0) = 0Tk​(0)=0 with TkT_kTk​ nondecreasing, and the idle time Ui(t)=t−Bi(t)U_i(t) = t - B_i(t)Ui​(t)=t−Bi​(t), where Bi(t)=∑k∈CiTk(t)B_i(t) = \sum_{k\in C_i} T_k(t)Bi​(t)=∑k∈Ci​​Tk​(t), is nondecreasing. The solution is work-conserving if UiU_iUi​ increases only at times when station iii holds no fluid. The immediate volume of station iii is Wi(t)=∑k∈CimkQk(t)W_i(t) = \sum_{k \in C_i} m_k Q_k(t)Wi​(t)=∑k∈Ci​​mk​Qk​(t).

The line is of Kelly type with station means β1,…,βI\beta_1, \dots, \beta_Iβ1​,…,βI​ if mk=βσ(k)m_k = \beta_{\sigma(k)}mk​=βσ(k)​ for every class kkk. Its routing has no immediate feedback if σ(k+1)≠σ(k)\sigma(k+1) \ne \sigma(k)σ(k+1)=σ(k) for every k<Kk < Kk<K. A set of fluid solutions is stable (Definition 1.3) if there is a δ>0\delta > 0δ>0 such that every solution in the set with ∣Q(0)∣=∑kQk(0)=1|Q(0)| = \sum_k Q_k(0) = 1∣Q(0)∣=∑k​Qk​(0)=1 is empty from time δ\deltaδ on.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.1

For a two-station Kelly-type reentrant line without immediate feedback that satisfies (1.7), the work-conserving fluid model is stable: there is δ>0\delta > 0δ>0 with

∑kQk(0)=1 ⟹ Qk(t)=0for all t≥δ, k=1,…,K,\sum_k Q_k(0) = 1 \ \Longrightarrow\ Q_k(t) = 0 \quad \text{for all } t \ge \delta,\ k = 1,\dots,K,k∑​Qk​(0)=1 ⟹ Qk​(t)=0for all t≥δ, k=1,…,K,

for every work-conserving fluid solution (Q,T)(Q,T)(Q,T). The number of classes KKK is arbitrary, of either parity, and the route may start at either station.

Milestones

The milestones follow the proof on p. 130 and the two general lemmas it uses: the extinction criterion of Lemma 2.2 (ii); the derivative of a maximum at an active index, display (3.2), already proved on the platform; the piecewise-linear Lyapunov Lemma 3.2; the drift identity Gi(t)=Gi(0)+∣Ci∣t−Bi(t)/βiG_i(t) = G_i(0) + |C_i|t - B_i(t)/\beta_iGi​(t)=Gi​(0)+∣Ci​∣t−Bi​(t)/βi​ for Gi=∑k∈CiQk+G_i = \sum_{k\in C_i} Q_k^+Gi​=∑k∈Ci​​Qk+​, with Qk+=∑l≤kQlQ_k^+ = \sum_{l\le k} Q_lQk+​=∑l≤k​Ql​; the comparison Wi(t)=0⇒Gi(t)≤Gj(t)W_i(t) = 0 \Rightarrow G_i(t) \le G_j(t)Wi​(t)=0⇒Gi​(t)≤Gj​(t); and the verification that G1,G2G_1, G_2G1​,G2​ meet the hypotheses of Lemma 3.2 with εi=1/βi−∣Ci∣\varepsilon_i = 1/\beta_i - |C_i|εi​=1/βi​−∣Ci​∣.

Significance

The result. Theorem 6.1 gives a class of networks in which stability needs no knowledge of the scheduling policy: any policy that never idles a server with work waiting is stable whenever the nominal loads are below one. For queueing networks this is the property usually called global stability. Through Theorem 1.1 of the paper (Dai 1995, Theorem 4.3) the fluid statement implies positive Harris recurrence of the corresponding multiclass queueing network under every work-conserving head-of-the-line policy. The paper's Remarks 2 and 3 show the boundary: with immediate feedback (the line 1,2,2,2,1,11,2,2,2,1,11,2,2,2,1,1 with all means 0.30.30.3), or with three stations, a Kelly-type line can be unstable. A two-station Kelly-type line without immediate feedback is a unidirectional ring with one customer type, so the theorem is a special case of the ring-network result the paper proves as Theorem 6.2. That result is an open goal on the platform (ProcessingNetworks.GlobalStability.ring_globally_stable, Dai and Harrison's Theorem 8.24) in a different encoding of the fluid model.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper, and the mission formalizes that proof. No machine-checked proof of the result, or of the Lyapunov lemmas it uses, is known to exist. The mission also produces reusable pieces: a fluid model of reentrant lines in the paper's own formulation, an extinction lemma for absolutely continuous functions, and the max-of-linear Lyapunov lemma, which the paper uses again in §§3 and 5.

Difficulty

The obvious Lyapunov function, the total workload, does not work: a work-conserving policy may starve a station while the other one is busy, so the total content need not decrease. The paper's components Gi=∑k∈CiQk+G_i = \sum_{k\in C_i}Q_k^+Gi​=∑k∈Ci​​Qk+​ each decrease at the constant rate 1/βi−∣Ci∣1/\beta_i - |C_i|1/βi​−∣Ci​∣ while station iii is busy. When station iii is idle, GiG_iGi​ can grow, and the argument then needs the comparison Gi≤GjG_i \le G_jGi​≤Gj​, which requires the alternating route. The analytic difficulty is the passage from these pointwise statements to extinction. Fluid paths are only Lipschitz. The maximum G=max⁡(G1,G2)G = \max(G_1, G_2)G=max(G1​,G2​) need not be differentiable where the maximum switches, and the drift statements hold only almost everywhere. Lemma 2.2 (ii) and the derivative-of-a-maximum fact (3.2) make this step rigorous. The proof for odd KKK is not printed ("can be proved similarly"), and the formal goal covers it.

Formalization scope

All objects live in the namespace DaiWeissFluid.KellyType. The conventions are fixed as follows.

  • Classes and stations are 0-based (Fin K, Fin I). The paper's class kkk is Lean k - 1.
  • Paths are total functions ℝ → Fin K → ℝ, and every equation is imposed for t≥0t \ge 0t≥0 only. Derivatives are taken at t>0t > 0t>0 via HasDerivAt.
  • Work conservation (1.13) is stated in interval form: UiU_iUi​ is constant on every interval [s,t]⊆[0,∞)[s,t] \subseteq [0,\infty)[s,t]⊆[0,∞) on which station iii holds fluid throughout. For the continuous nondecreasing UiU_iUi​ this is equivalent to the paper's Stieltjes condition. Lipschitz continuity of the paths is not assumed, because it follows from the model.
  • mk>0m_k > 0mk​>0 is an explicit hypothesis. ∣Q(0)∣|Q(0)|∣Q(0)∣ is ∑kQk(0)\sum_k Q_k(0)∑k​Qk​(0).
  • Stability is Definition 1.3, which constrains only solutions with ∣Q(0)∣=1|Q(0)| = 1∣Q(0)∣=1.
  • The paper's Theorem 6.1 says "any work-conserving policy is stable", which is stability of the queueing network (Definition 1.1). Its proof establishes stability of the work-conserving fluid model, and the queueing-level conclusion follows from the cited Theorem 1.1 (Dai 1995). The goal is the fluid statement. Theorem 1.1 and the stochastic model are not formalized.
  • Lemma 2.2 (ii) is stated with the hypothesis g˙≤−ε\dot g \le -\varepsilong˙​≤−ε, where the page prints <<<. This is the form in which every application uses it, and it gives a stronger lemma.
  • The drift identity is stated for every Kelly-type line, which implies the printed K=2nK = 2nK=2n display. The printed "G2(t)=G2(t)+nt−…G_2(t) = G_2(t) + nt - \dotsG2​(t)=G2​(t)+nt−…" is read as G2(0)+nt−…G_2(0) + nt - \dotsG2​(0)+nt−….
  • Condition (b) and the Lemma 3.2 check are stated for both parities of KKK and both starting stations. A station with no classes has its εi\varepsilon_iεi​ left free.

The goal must not be trivialized. It quantifies over all work-conserving solutions with ∣Q(0)∣=1|Q(0)| = 1∣Q(0)∣=1, and this set is nonempty: a sorry-free witness with K=2K = 2K=2 is checked locally. Neither the Kelly-type hypothesis nor the absence of immediate feedback may be dropped (Remark 2), nor may the goal be generalized beyond two stations (Remark 3). Restricting it to even KKK, or to a route starting at station 1, would weaken it.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the general Lemmas 2.2 (ii) and 3.2, which apply across the whole series; the drift identity, which is pure algebra from (1.8); the continuity facts for fluid paths (Lipschitz bounds from (1.10)–(1.12)); and the final assembly.

Selected references

  • J. G. Dai and G. Weiss, Stability and instability of fluid models for reentrant lines, Mathematics of Operations Research 21(1), 115–134, 1996. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.21.1.115
  • J. G. Dai, On positive Harris recurrence of multiclass queueing networks: a unified approach via fluid limit models, Annals of Applied Probability 5(1), 49–77, 1995. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177004828
  • S. H. Lu and P. R. Kumar, Distributed scheduling based on due dates and buffer priorities, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 36(12), 1406–1416, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.106156
  • F. P. Kelly, Reversibility and Stochastic Networks, Wiley, 1979.
  • J. G. Dai and J. M. Harrison, Processing Networks: Fluid Models and Stability, Cambridge University Press, 2020. https://doi.org/10.1017/9781108772662
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
AnalysisControl TheoryPartial Differential Equations·Captain: mikedeng1

An Example on the Effect of Time Delays in Boundary Feedback Stabilization of Wave Equations: The Spectral Stability Trichotomy at the Feedback Gain k = (1 − K)/(1 + K), K = e^{−2a}Research Paper

Why delays in boundary feedback matter

Boundary feedback is the standard way to stabilize vibrating structures governed by wave equations: a sensor measures the velocity at the boundary and an actuator applies a force proportional to it. For the one-dimensional damped wave equation with such feedback, the closed loop is uniformly exponentially stable (Chen, 1979). In practice the measured velocity reaches the actuator only after a computation time, so the feedback acts with a time delay ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0. The question addressed by Datko, Lagnese and Polis (1986) is whether arbitrarily small delays can destroy the stability of a system that is stable without them.

Their note answers it with an explicit example and a sharp threshold on the feedback gain. It is the founding example of delay-induced instability in boundary stabilization, cited by most later work on robustness of boundary control to delays.

Timeline.

  • Chen (1979, 1981): energy decay E(u,t)≤Ce−αtE(u,0)E(u,t) \le Ce^{-\alpha t}E(u,0)E(u,t)≤Ce−αtE(u,0) for boundary-damped wave equations without delay.
  • Datko (1978): delays in the velocity term of the equation itself can destabilize; a lemma on zeros of exponential polynomials in vertical strips (the source of Lemma 1 here).
  • Datko, Lagnese, Polis (1986, DOI 10.1137/0324007): the delayed boundary feedback ux(1,t)=−kut(1,t−ε)u_x(1,t) = -ku_t(1,t-\varepsilon)ux​(1,t)=−kut​(1,t−ε) for the damped string, with a trichotomy in the gain kkk.
  • Nicaise and Pignotti (2006, DOI 10.1137/060648891): the multidimensional undamped problem with feedback −μ1ut(t)−μ2ut(t−τ)-\mu_1u_t(t) - \mu_2u_t(t-\tau)−μ1​ut​(t)−μ2​ut​(t−τ); stability iff μ2<μ1\mu_2 < \mu_1μ2​<μ1​, instability for a sequence of delays otherwise.

Setting

Fix real numbers a≥0a \ge 0a≥0 (damping), k≥0k \ge 0k≥0 (feedback gain) and ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 (delay), and put K=e−2a∈(0,1]K = e^{-2a} \in (0,1]K=e−2a∈(0,1]. The delayed system is

(1)utt−uxx+2aut+a2u=0,0<x<1, t>0,(2)u(0,t)=0,t>0,(8)ux(1,t)=−k ut(1,t−ε),t>ε.\begin{aligned} &(1)\quad u_{tt} - u_{xx} + 2au_t + a^2u = 0, && 0<x<1,\ t>0,\\ &(2)\quad u(0,t) = 0, && t>0,\\ &(8)\quad u_x(1,t) = -k\,u_t(1,t-\varepsilon), && t>\varepsilon . \end{aligned}​(1)utt​−uxx​+2aut​+a2u=0,(2)u(0,t)=0,(8)ux​(1,t)=−kut​(1,t−ε),​​0<x<1, t>0,t>0,t>ε.​

A classical solution is a C2C^2C2 function u(x,t)u(x,t)u(x,t) with complex values satisfying (1), (2), (8).

Separated solutions u=eωtφ(x)u = e^{\omega t}\varphi(x)u=eωtφ(x) lead to the eigenvalue problem

φ′′(x)=(a+ω)2φ(x) (0<x<1),φ(0)=0,φ′(1)+kωe−εωφ(1)=0.\varphi''(x) = (a+\omega)^2\varphi(x)\ (0<x<1),\qquad \varphi(0) = 0,\qquad \varphi'(1) + k\omega e^{-\varepsilon\omega}\varphi(1) = 0 .φ′′(x)=(a+ω)2φ(x) (0<x<1),φ(0)=0,φ′(1)+kωe−εωφ(1)=0.

The spectrum σ(a,k,ε)\sigma(a,k,\varepsilon)σ(a,k,ε) is the set of ω∈C\omega \in \mathbb Cω∈C for which this problem has a solution φ\varphiφ not identically zero on [0,1][0,1][0,1]. The paper encodes it through the entire functions

f(ε,ω)=1+Ke−2ω+ke−εω(1−Ke−2ω),h(ε,ω)=ωf(ε,ω)+a(1+Ke−2ω),f(\varepsilon,\omega) = 1 + Ke^{-2\omega} + ke^{-\varepsilon\omega}(1 - Ke^{-2\omega}),\qquad h(\varepsilon,\omega) = \omega f(\varepsilon,\omega) + a(1 + Ke^{-2\omega}),f(ε,ω)=1+Ke−2ω+ke−εω(1−Ke−2ω),h(ε,ω)=ωf(ε,ω)+a(1+Ke−2ω),

and the critical gain (1−K)/(1+K)(1-K)/(1+K)(1−K)/(1+K). In Lean these are K a, f a k ε ω, h a k ε ω, delaySpectrum a k ε, IsClassicalSolution a k ε u and IsExpUnstableSolution a k ε u in the namespace DatkoDelayWave.BoundaryDelay.

Formalization targets

Goal: the stability trichotomy (THEOREM, p. 153)

  1. If 0<k<1−K1+K0 < k < \frac{1-K}{1+K}0<k<1+K1−K​: for each ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 there is β(ε)>0\beta(\varepsilon) > 0β(ε)>0 with
σ(a,k,ε)⊆{Re⁡ω≤−β}.\sigma(a,k,\varepsilon) \subseteq \{\operatorname{Re}\omega \le -\beta\}.σ(a,k,ε)⊆{Reω≤−β}.
  1. If k=1−K1+K>0k = \frac{1-K}{1+K} > 0k=1+K1−K​>0: for each ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0, σ(a,k,ε)⊆{Re⁡ω<0}\sigma(a,k,\varepsilon) \subseteq \{\operatorname{Re}\omega < 0\}σ(a,k,ε)⊆{Reω<0}, but there is a countable set R⊆(0,∞)R \subseteq (0,\infty)R⊆(0,∞), dense in (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞), such that for each ε∈R\varepsilon \in Rε∈R some sequence ωn∈σ(a,k,ε)\omega_n \in \sigma(a,k,\varepsilon)ωn​∈σ(a,k,ε) has Re⁡ωn→0\operatorname{Re}\omega_n \to 0Reωn​→0.
  2. If k>1−K1+Kk > \frac{1-K}{1+K}k>1+K1−K​: there is an open set D⊆(0,∞)D \subseteq (0,\infty)D⊆(0,∞), dense in (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞), such that for each ε∈D\varepsilon \in Dε∈D the system has a classical solution with ∣u(x0,t)∣≥ceγt|u(x_0,t)| \ge ce^{\gamma t}∣u(x0​,t)∣≥ceγt for some γ,c>0\gamma, c > 0γ,c>0, x0∈(0,1)x_0 \in (0,1)x0​∈(0,1) and all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0.

Milestones

In attack order: the characteristic equation (16) (ω∈σ  ⟺  h(ε,ω)=0\omega \in \sigma \iff h(\varepsilon,\omega) = 0ω∈σ⟺h(ε,ω)=0 for ω≠−a\omega \ne -aω=−a); separated solutions; Lemma 1 (one zero of fff forces infinitely many zeros of fff and hhh in every vertical strip around it); (17)–(18) (no zeros of hhh in the right half-plane below or at the critical gain); the half-plane bound below the critical gain; (19) (no purely imaginary zeros at the critical gain); the explicit zero f(2(2m+1)2n+1,(2n+1)πi2)=0f\bigl(\tfrac{2(2m+1)}{2n+1}, \tfrac{(2n+1)\pi i}{2}\bigr) = 0f(2n+12(2m+1)​,2(2n+1)πi​)=0; density of the delays 2(2m+1)2n+1\tfrac{2(2m+1)}{2n+1}2n+12(2m+1)​; the root family (12)–(15) above the critical gain; Lemma 2 (an open dense set of delays with zeros of fff in Re⁡ω>0\operatorname{Re}\omega > 0Reω>0); the three parts of the THEOREM separately; and, off the goal's path, the undelayed formula Re⁡ω=12log⁡∣k−1k+1∣\operatorname{Re}\omega = \tfrac12\log\bigl|\tfrac{k-1}{k+1}\bigr|Reω=21​log​k+1k−1​​ for a=0a = 0a=0.

Significance

The result shows that exponential stability obtained by boundary velocity feedback is not robust to delays when the gain is above (1−K)/(1+K)(1-K)/(1+K)(1−K)/(1+K): delays from a dense set of lengths, including arbitrarily small ones, produce exponentially growing modes. When a=0a = 0a=0 the critical gain is 000, so every positive gain is fragile. Below the critical gain the spectral gap survives every delay. This identifies a quantitative robustness margin and motivated the later analysis of delayed boundary control, including the Nicaise–Pignotti theorems already posed on the platform for a different, multidimensional model (NicaiseDelayWave.*).

The result is proved in the paper, partly by citation: Lemma 1 is quoted from Datko (1978) without proof, and the open-mapping step of Lemma 2 is sketched. No machine-checked version exists. A formalization would check the threshold computations, supply the strip-zero lemma for this exponential polynomial, and give a rigorous version of the open-mapping step.

Difficulty

The algebraic parts, (16)–(19) and the explicit zeros, are calculations with complex exponentials. The difficulty is in Lemma 1 and Lemma 2. Lemma 1 needs the almost-periodic structure of exponential polynomials in vertical strips together with a Hurwitz or Rouché type argument, and neither is in Mathlib. Lemma 2 needs zeros of f(ε,⋅)f(\varepsilon,\cdot)f(ε,⋅) to persist under small changes of the real parameter ε\varepsilonε. The paper's route through the logarithmic map (11) does not work as printed, because it is stated with the principal branch exactly on the branch cut. In part (i), the delicate step is excluding accumulation of zeros at the imaginary axis as ∣Im⁡ω∣→∞|\operatorname{Im}\omega| \to \infty∣Imω∣→∞, which the half-plane estimate alone does not give.

Formalization scope

Parameters a,k,εa, k, \varepsilona,k,ε are real, ω∈C\omega \in \mathbb Cω∈C, eigenfunctions are maps R→C\mathbb R \to \mathbb CR→C and solutions are maps u:R→R→Cu : \mathbb R \to \mathbb R \to \mathbb Cu:R→R→C (space first). Partial derivatives are deriv of the sections. Solutions and eigenfunctions are required to be C2C^2C2 on all of R2\mathbb R^2R2, resp. R\mathbb RR; this loses no eigenvalue, since solutions of (5) are combinations of e±(a+ω)xe^{\pm(a+\omega)x}e±(a+ω)x. Committed readings of the paper's loose phrases:

  • the spectrum is the eigenvalue set of the problem above, not the zero set of hhh; h(ε,−a)=0h(\varepsilon,-a) = 0h(ε,−a)=0 always, so (16) is stated for ω≠−a\omega \neq -aω=−a;
  • "countably dense set RRR in (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞)": R⊆(0,∞)R \subseteq (0,\infty)R⊆(0,∞), RRR countable, (0,∞)⊆R‾(0,\infty) \subseteq \overline R(0,∞)⊆R;
  • "dense open set DDD in (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞)": D⊆(0,∞)D \subseteq (0,\infty)D⊆(0,∞) open, (0,∞)⊆D‾(0,\infty) \subseteq \overline D(0,∞)⊆D;
  • "exponentially unstable solution": a classical solution with ∣u(x0,t)∣≥ceγt|u(x_0,t)| \ge ce^{\gamma t}∣u(x0​,t)∣≥ceγt for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0;
  • "an infinite number of zeros" (Lemma 1): the zero set in the open strip is infinite, for fff and for hhh separately;
  • "there exists β(ε)>0\beta(\varepsilon) > 0β(ε)>0": ∀ε>0 ∃β>0\forall \varepsilon > 0\ \exists \beta > 0∀ε>0 ∃β>0, so β\betaβ may depend on ε\varepsilonε;
  • part (ii) carries k>0k > 0k>0, the paper's standing assumption (p. 152); without it the part is false at a=0a = 0a=0;
  • m,nm, nm,n in 2(2m+1)/(2n+1)2(2m+1)/(2n+1)2(2m+1)/(2n+1) are positive integers in (12)–(15) and in the density of (15), as in the proof of Lemma 2; in the explicit threshold zero, where the page says "m,nm, nm,n are arbitrary", they range over all natural numbers.

Trivializing encodings are ruled out: defining the spectrum as the zero set of hhh would make −a-a−a a spurious spectral point, and reading "exponentially unstable" as "the spectrum meets Re⁡ω>0\operatorname{Re}\omega > 0Reω>0" would delete the solution-level content of part (iii).

A complete development needs zero-counting tools for exponential polynomials in strips (almost periodicity, Hurwitz's theorem), which would be reusable for other delay equations. Contributions to any milestone, and to that general infrastructure, are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. Datko, J. Lagnese, M. P. Polis, An example on the effect of time delays in boundary feedback stabilization of wave equations, SIAM J. Control Optim. 24(1), 152–156, 1986. https://doi.org/10.1137/0324007
  • R. Datko, A procedure for determination of the exponential stability of certain differential-difference equations, Quart. Appl. Math. 36, 279–292, 1978.
  • G. Chen, Energy decay estimates and exact boundary value controllability for the wave equation in a bounded domain, J. Math. Pures Appl. 58, 249–274, 1979.
  • S. Nicaise, C. Pignotti, Stability and instability results of the wave equation with a delay term in the boundary or internal feedbacks, SIAM J. Control Optim. 45(5), 1561–1585, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1137/060648891
16 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms 4: Subgaussian Martingale Noise with Σ exp(−c/γ_n) < ∞ for Every c > 0 Satisfies Assumption A1 Almost SurelyResearch Paper

Motivation

A stochastic approximation algorithm is a recursion

xn+1−xn=γn+1(F(xn)+Un+1)x_{n+1}-x_n=\gamma_{n+1}\big(F(x_n)+U_{n+1}\big)xn+1​−xn​=γn+1​(F(xn​)+Un+1​)

in Rd\mathbb R^dRd, where FFF is a vector field, γn\gamma_nγn​ are small step sizes and Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​ is noise. Such recursions go back to Robbins and Monro's root-finding scheme (Robbins–Monro 1951) and underlie stochastic gradient descent, temporal-difference learning, adaptive control and learning in games. The ODE method studies them by comparing the iterates with the trajectories of x˙=F(x)\dot x=F(x)x˙=F(x).

Benaïm's lecture notes (Benaïm 1999) organize the ODE method in two steps. A deterministic step, Proposition 4.1, shows that whenever the noise satisfies a condition called A1 (together with a boundedness condition on the iterates), the interpolated process is an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF. A probabilistic step then verifies A1 for concrete noise models. Proposition 4.2 does this for martingale difference noise with bounded qqq-th moments, at the price of step sizes with ∑nγn1+q/2<∞\sum_n\gamma_n^{1+q/2}<\infty∑n​γn1+q/2​<∞. This mission formalizes the second verification, Proposition 4.4: when the noise is subgaussian, A1 holds almost surely under the much weaker requirement that ∑ne−c/γn<∞\sum_ne^{-c/\gamma_n}<\infty∑n​e−c/γn​<∞ for every c>0c>0c>0, which allows step sizes decaying only slightly faster than 1/log⁡n1/\log n1/logn. The notes attribute the result to Duflo (1997), see also Kushner and Yin (1997) and Benaïm and Hirsch (1996).

Setting

Let {γn}n≥1\{\gamma_n\}_{n\ge1}{γn​}n≥1​ be a deterministic sequence with γn≥0\gamma_n\ge0γn​≥0, ∑nγn=∞\sum_n\gamma_n=\infty∑n​γn​=∞ and γn→0\gamma_n\to0γn​→0 (a step sequence). Put τ0=0\tau_0=0τ0​=0, τn=∑i=1nγi\tau_n=\sum_{i=1}^n\gamma_iτn​=∑i=1n​γi​, and let

m(t)=sup⁡{k≥0: t≥τk}m(t)=\sup\{k\ge0:\ t\ge\tau_k\}m(t)=sup{k≥0: t≥τk​}

be the index of the step that contains time t≥0t\ge0t≥0. For a sequence {Un}n≥1\{U_n\}_{n\ge1}{Un​}n≥1​ define the piecewise constant processes Uˉ(t)=Um(t)+1\bar U(t)=U_{m(t)+1}Uˉ(t)=Um(t)+1​ and γˉ(t)=γm(t)+1\bar\gamma(t)=\gamma_{m(t)+1}γˉ​(t)=γm(t)+1​, so that step n+1n+1n+1 occupies the time interval [τn,τn+1)[\tau_n,\tau_{n+1})[τn​,τn+1​) of length γn+1\gamma_{n+1}γn+1​.

Assumption A1 asks that for every T>0T>0T>0

lim⁡n→∞sup⁡{∥∑i=nk−1γi+1Ui+1∥: k=n+1,…,m(τn+T)}=0,\lim_{n\to\infty}\sup\Big\{\Big\|\sum_{i=n}^{k-1}\gamma_{i+1}U_{i+1}\Big\|:\ k=n+1,\dots,m(\tau_n+T)\Big\}=0,n→∞lim​sup{​i=n∑k−1​γi+1​Ui+1​​: k=n+1,…,m(τn​+T)}=0,

or, in the form the notes call equivalent, lim⁡t→∞Δ(t,T)=0\lim_{t\to\infty}\Delta(t,T)=0limt→∞​Δ(t,T)=0 for every T>0T>0T>0, where

Δ(t,T)=sup⁡0≤h≤T∥∫tt+hUˉ(s) ds∥.\Delta(t,T)=\sup_{0\le h\le T}\Big\|\int_t^{t+h}\bar U(s)\,ds\Big\|.Δ(t,T)=0≤h≤Tsup​​∫tt+h​Uˉ(s)ds​.

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space with a nondecreasing sequence {Fn}\{\mathcal F_n\}{Fn​} of sub-σ\sigmaσ-algebras, and F:Rd→RdF:\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb R^dF:Rd→Rd continuous. A sequence {xn}\{x_n\}{xn​} given by the recursion above is a Robbins–Monro algorithm if γ\gammaγ is deterministic, UnU_nUn​ is Fn\mathcal F_nFn​-measurable, and E(Un+1∣Fn)=0E(U_{n+1}\mid\mathcal F_n)=0E(Un+1​∣Fn​)=0. The noise is subgaussian if there is a number Γ>0\Gamma>0Γ>0 such that for all nnn and all θ∈Rd\theta\in\mathbb R^dθ∈Rd

E(exp⁡⟨θ,Un+1⟩ ∣ Fn)≤exp⁡(Γ2∥θ∥2).E\big(\exp\langle\theta,U_{n+1}\rangle\,\big|\,\mathcal F_n\big)\le\exp\Big(\frac\Gamma2\|\theta\|^2\Big).E(exp⟨θ,Un+1​⟩​Fn​)≤exp(2Γ​∥θ∥2).

Bounded noise, ∥Un∥≤Γ\|U_n\|\le\sqrt\Gamma∥Un​∥≤Γ​, is an example.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 4.4

For a Robbins–Monro algorithm with subgaussian noise and a deterministic step sequence such that

∑ne−c/γn<∞for each c>0,\sum_ne^{-c/\gamma_n}<\infty\qquad\text{for each }c>0,n∑​e−c/γn​<∞for each c>0,

with probability one the realised noise sequence satisfies A1, in both of its forms, simultaneously for all T>0T>0T>0.

Milestones

  1. The exponential supermartingale. For every θ∈Rd\theta\in\mathbb R^dθ∈Rd,
Zn(θ)=exp⁡[∑i=1n⟨θ,γiUi⟩−Γ2∑i=1nγi2∥θ∥2]Z_n(\theta)=\exp\Big[\sum_{i=1}^n\langle\theta,\gamma_iU_i\rangle-\frac\Gamma2\sum_{i=1}^n\gamma_i^2\|\theta\|^2\Big]Zn​(θ)=exp[i=1∑n​⟨θ,γi​Ui​⟩−2Γ​i=1∑n​γi2​∥θ∥2]

is a supermartingale. 2. Directional maximal tail bound. For every unit vector eee, α>0\alpha>0α>0, nnn and T>0T>0T>0,

P(sup⁡n<k≤m(τn+T)⟨e,∑i=nk−1γi+1Ui+1⟩≥α)≤exp⁡(−α22Γ∑i=nm(τn+T)−1γi+12).P\Big(\sup_{n<k\le m(\tau_n+T)}\Big\langle e,\sum_{i=n}^{k-1}\gamma_{i+1}U_{i+1}\Big\rangle\ge\alpha\Big)\le\exp\Big(\frac{-\alpha^2}{2\Gamma\sum_{i=n}^{m(\tau_n+T)-1}\gamma_{i+1}^2}\Big).P(n<k≤m(τn​+T)sup​⟨e,i=n∑k−1​γi+1​Ui+1​⟩≥α)≤exp(2Γ∑i=nm(τn​+T)−1​γi+12​−α2​).
  1. Eq. (18). There are C,C′>0C,C'>0C,C′>0 depending only on ddd and Γ\GammaΓ with
P(Δ(t,T)≥α)≤Cexp⁡(−α2C′∫tt+Tγˉ(s) ds)(t≥0, T>0, α>0).P(\Delta(t,T)\ge\alpha)\le C\exp\Big(\frac{-\alpha^2}{C'\int_t^{t+T}\bar\gamma(s)\,ds}\Big)\qquad(t\ge0,\ T>0,\ \alpha>0).P(Δ(t,T)≥α)≤Cexp(C′∫tt+T​γˉ​(s)ds−α2​)(t≥0, T>0, α>0).
  1. Block comparison. Δ(t,T)≤2Δ(kT,T)+Δ((k+1)T,T)\Delta(t,T)\le2\Delta(kT,T)+\Delta((k+1)T,T)Δ(t,T)≤2Δ(kT,T)+Δ((k+1)T,T) for kT≤t<(k+1)TkT\le t<(k+1)TkT≤t<(k+1)T.

Significance

Proposition 4.4 is the sufficient condition for the ODE method when the noise has Gaussian-type tails. Its step-size condition holds whenever γnlog⁡n→0\gamma_n\log n\to0γn​logn→0, so it admits steps that decrease far more slowly than the ∑γn2<∞\sum\gamma_n^2<\infty∑γn2​<∞ of the classical L2L^2L2 theory; slowly decreasing steps are what practitioners use to keep algorithms responsive. Combined with Proposition 4.1 it shows that the interpolated process of such an algorithm, with bounded iterates, is almost surely an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF, and the limit set theorems of the notes then locate the limit points of the algorithm.

The result is proved in the notes and in the cited literature; it has not, to our knowledge, been machine-checked. A formal proof would add reusable pieces: an exponential supermartingale and maximal inequality for vector-valued martingale differences with a conditional subgaussian bound (Mathlib's conditional subgaussian notion is scalar), a Borel–Cantelli argument along the grid kTkTkT, and the continuous-time bookkeeping of Uˉ\bar UUˉ, γˉ\bar\gammaγˉ​ and Δ\DeltaΔ shared with the other missions of this series.

Difficulty

The moment method of Proposition 4.2 does not reach this regime: any fixed polynomial moment of the window sums decays only polynomially in the window's step sizes, and under ∑e−c/γn<∞\sum e^{-c/\gamma_n}<\infty∑e−c/γn​<∞ alone polynomial bounds are not summable over windows. Exponential tail bounds are needed, and they must be maximal (uniform over the window) and must hold for the norm of a vector, not only for a scalar. The continuous-time deviation Δ(t,T)\Delta(t,T)Δ(t,T) involves partial steps at both ends of [t,t+h][t,t+h][t,t+h], so the bound must be stated in terms of ∫tt+Tγˉ\int_t^{t+T}\bar\gamma∫tt+T​γˉ​ rather than a sum over whole steps, with constants that do not depend on ttt, TTT or α\alphaα. Finally, A1 quantifies over all T>0T>0T>0: the almost-sure statement must hold on a single event of full probability for every TTT.

Formalization scope

The space is Rd\mathbb R^dRd as EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d) (the paper writes Rm\mathbb R^mRm); time is real. The sequences γ\gammaγ and UUU are indexed by N\mathbb NN, and their values at 000 are unused, as the paper indexes them from 111. The filtration is a Mathlib Filtration ℕ; Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​ is Fn+1\mathcal F_{n+1}Fn+1​-strongly measurable and integrable, and E(Un+1∣Fn)=0E(U_{n+1}\mid\mathcal F_n)=0E(Un+1​∣Fn​)=0 almost surely. The subgaussian condition requires exp⁡⟨θ,Un+1⟩\exp\langle\theta,U_{n+1}\rangleexp⟨θ,Un+1​⟩ to be integrable for every θ\thetaθ and nnn. The summand e−c/γne^{-c/\gamma_n}e−c/γn​ is taken to be 000 when γn=0\gamma_n=0γn​=0, its limiting value. The suprema in A1 and Δ\DeltaΔ are taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]; the supremum over an empty range of kkk is 000. In Eq. (18) the constants are chosen before the probability space, the algorithm and t,T,αt,T,\alphat,T,α.

The following readings are excluded and are not acceptable formalizations: a subgaussian condition that holds vacuously because the exponential is not integrable (Lean's conditional expectation of a non-integrable function is 000); a summability condition made trivial or false by the convention c/0=0c/0=0c/0=0; and the conclusion "for each TTT, A1 holds almost surely" in place of "almost surely, A1 holds for all TTT". The second sentence of Proposition 4.4 (the asymptotic pseudotrajectory conclusion) is outside this mission.

All hypotheses are satisfiable: U=0U=0U=0, x=0x=0x=0, F=0F=0F=0, Γ=1\Gamma=1Γ=1 and γn=1/n\gamma_n=1/nγn​=1/n satisfy every one of them.

Contributions welcome: a maximal inequality for nonnegative supermartingales in the form needed here, vector subgaussian tail bounds for martingale transforms with deterministic weights (reusable well beyond this mission), lemmas on the step processes and Δ\DeltaΔ (measurability, local integrability, additivity), and the proofs of the milestones.

Selected references

  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, Springer, 1999, pp. 1–68. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • M. Duflo, Random Iterative Models, Applications of Mathematics 34, Springer, 1997.
  • H. J. Kushner and G. G. Yin, Stochastic Approximation Algorithms and Applications, Springer, 1997.
  • M. Benaïm and M. W. Hirsch, Asymptotic pseudotrajectories and chain recurrent flows, with applications, Journal of Dynamics and Differential Equations 8 (1996), 141–176. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02218617
  • H. Robbins and S. Monro, A stochastic approximation method, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 22 (1951), 400–407. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729586
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms 6: An Attractor Whose Basin Meets the Attainable Set Contains the Limit Set with Positive ProbabilityResearch Paper

Motivation

A stochastic approximation algorithm is a recursion xn+1=xn+γn+1(F(xn)+Un+1)x_{n+1}=x_n+\gamma_{n+1}\big(F(x_n)+U_{n+1}\big)xn+1​=xn​+γn+1​(F(xn​)+Un+1​) with decreasing step sizes γn\gamma_nγn​ and a noise term Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​. Recursions of this form appear in stochastic gradient methods, adaptive control, learning in games (fictitious play, reinforcement learning) and urn models. The ODE method compares the iterates with the solutions of x˙=F(x)\dot x=F(x)x˙=F(x). In Benaïm's lecture notes (Benaïm 1999), the comparison is phrased through the continuous-time interpolated process XXX. Under standard noise conditions, XXX is almost surely an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF, and its limit set is almost surely internally chain transitive.

That theorem constrains where the process may end up. It does not say which of several candidate sets the process actually reaches. When the ODE has several attractors, for example several stable equilibria of a learning dynamic or several stable compositions of an urn, an application needs to know that each attractor is reached with positive probability. Section 7 of the notes answers this question. The answer is a criterion of attainability: if the process can, with positive probability and at arbitrarily late times, enter the basin of an attractor, then it converges to that attractor with positive probability.

Timeline.

  • Kushner and Clark (1978) proved convergence statements for processes that visit a compact subset of the domain of attraction of an asymptotically stable equilibrium infinitely often.
  • Arthur, Ermoliev and Kaniovski (1983) and Pemantle (1990) studied urn processes whose limit points depend on the trajectory.
  • Benaïm (1997) and Duflo (1997, Random Iterative Models) developed the attainability argument for general stochastic approximation processes.
  • Benaïm (1999) states it for arbitrary attractors of a semiflow on a locally compact metric space, under a single conditional shadowing condition (24).

Setting

Let (M,d)(M,d)(M,d) be a metric space and let Φ=(Φt)t≥0\Phi=(\Phi_t)_{t\ge0}Φ=(Φt​)t≥0​ be a semiflow on MMM: a continuous map (t,x)↦Φt(x)(t,x)\mapsto\Phi_t(x)(t,x)↦Φt​(x) with Φ0=Id\Phi_0=\mathrm{Id}Φ0​=Id and Φt+s=Φt∘Φs\Phi_{t+s}=\Phi_t\circ\Phi_sΦt+s​=Φt​∘Φs​.

  • A set AAA is invariant if Φt(A)=A\Phi_t(A)=AΦt​(A)=A for all t≥0t\ge0t≥0, and positively invariant if Φt(A)⊂A\Phi_t(A)\subset AΦt​(A)⊂A.
  • An attractor is a nonempty compact invariant set AAA with a neighbourhood WWW on which dist⁡(Φtx,A)→0\operatorname{dist}(\Phi_tx,A)\to0dist(Φt​x,A)→0 uniformly. Its basin B(A)B(A)B(A) is the set of points xxx with dist⁡(Φtx,A)→0\operatorname{dist}(\Phi_tx,A)\to0dist(Φt​x,A)→0.
  • A continuous curve X:R+→MX:\mathbb R_+\to MX:R+​→M is an asymptotic pseudotrajectory if sup⁡0≤h≤Td(X(t+h),Φh(X(t)))→0\sup_{0\le h\le T}d(X(t+h),\Phi_h(X(t)))\to0sup0≤h≤T​d(X(t+h),Φh​(X(t)))→0 as t→∞t\to\inftyt→∞, for every T>0T>0T>0.
  • The limit set of XXX is L(X)=⋂t≥0X([t,∞))‾L(X)=\bigcap_{t\ge0}\overline{X([t,\infty))}L(X)=⋂t≥0​X([t,∞))​.
  • For T>0T>0T>0, dX(T)=sup⁡k∈Nd(ΦT(X(kT)),X(kT+T))d_X(T)=\sup_{k\in\mathbb N}d(\Phi_T(X(kT)),X(kT+T))dX​(T)=supk∈N​d(ΦT​(X(kT)),X(kT+T)).

Now let X=(X(t))t≥0X=(X(t))_{t\ge0}X=(X(t))t≥0​ be a process on a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) with continuous paths in MMM, adapted to a filtration (Ft)t≥0(\mathcal F_t)_{t\ge0}(Ft​)t≥0​. The standing assumption of Section 7 is that for all δ>0\delta>0δ>0, T>0T>0T>0 and t≥0t\ge0t≥0,

P(sup⁡s≥t sup⁡0≤h≤Td(X(s+h),Φh(X(s)))≥δ ∣ Ft)≤w(t,δ,T)(24)P\Big(\sup_{s\ge t}\ \sup_{0\le h\le T}d\big(X(s+h),\Phi_h(X(s))\big)\ge\delta\ \Big|\ \mathcal F_t\Big)\le w(t,\delta,T)\tag{24}P(s≥tsup​ 0≤h≤Tsup​d(X(s+h),Φh​(X(s)))≥δ ​ Ft​)≤w(t,δ,T)(24)

for a function w≥0w\ge0w≥0 with w(t,δ,T)↓0w(t,\delta,T)\downarrow0w(t,δ,T)↓0 as t→∞t\to\inftyt→∞.

A point ppp is attainable if P(∃s≥t:X(s)∈U)>0P(\exists s\ge t: X(s)\in U)>0P(∃s≥t:X(s)∈U)>0 for every t>0t>0t>0 and every open neighbourhood UUU of ppp. Att(X)\mathrm{Att}(X)Att(X) is the set of attainable points.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.3, first statement

If MMM is locally compact, AAA is an attractor of Φ\PhiΦ, and Att(X)∩B(A)≠∅\mathrm{Att}(X)\cap B(A)\neq\emptysetAtt(X)∩B(A)=∅, then

P(L(X)⊂A)>0.P\big(L(X)\subset A\big)>0 .P(L(X)⊂A)>0.

This statement contains no constants and no rates, so it does not depend on how (24) is quantified for a particular algorithm.

Theorem 7.3, second statement

If UUU is open and relatively compact with U‾⊂B(A)\overline U\subset B(A)U⊂B(A), there are T,δ>0T,\delta>0T,δ>0, depending only on UUU (and on Φ\PhiΦ, AAA), such that for every process satisfying the standing assumption and every t≥0t\ge0t≥0

P(L(X)⊂A)≥(1−w(t,δ,T)) P(∃s≥t: X(s)∈U).P\big(L(X)\subset A\big)\ge\big(1-w(t,\delta,T)\big)\,P\big(\exists s\ge t:\ X(s)\in U\big).P(L(X)⊂A)≥(1−w(t,δ,T))P(∃s≥t: X(s)∈U).

Milestones

  • Lemma 6.8. For a nonempty compact K⊂B(A)K\subset B(A)K⊂B(A) there are T,δ>0T,\delta>0T,δ>0 such that every asymptotic pseudotrajectory with X(0)∈KX(0)\in KX(0)∈K and dX(T)<δd_X(T)<\deltadX​(T)<δ has L(X)⊂AL(X)\subset AL(X)⊂A.
  • Lemma 7.1, in three parts:
    • Att(X)\mathrm{Att}(X)Att(X) is closed;
    • it is positively invariant;
    • it contains L(X)L(X)L(X) almost surely.

Significance

The result. Theorem 7.3 turns a question about the long-run limit of a random process into a question about where the process can go. Attainability is usually checked by a controllability argument: the noise can push the iterates in every direction. For urn processes with an urn function mapping the simplex into its interior, every point is attainable (Example 7.2 of the notes). Then every attractor of the mean ODE is reached with positive probability. Combined with nonconvergence results for unstable sets (Section 9 of the notes), this characterizes the possible limits of many learning and urn processes. Theorem 7.3 is the positive half of that picture.

Formalizing it. The theorem has a published proof (p. 32 of the notes) and no machine-checked version. A formal proof needs the following:

  • a precise reading of the conditional shadowing condition (24) as a conditional expectation of an indicator;
  • the stopping-time decomposition of the event {∃s≥t:X(s)∈U}\{\exists s\ge t: X(s)\in U\}{∃s≥t:X(s)∈U} over dyadic times;
  • the deterministic Lemma 6.8, which rests on the limit set theorem for precompact asymptotic pseudotrajectories (Theorem 5.7 of the notes, the subject of mission 1 of this series).

Difficulty

The obvious argument says: once XXX enters a compact part of the basin, the flow carries it into AAA. That fails because XXX is not a trajectory of the flow. Each window of length TTT adds an error, and errors over infinitely many windows can push the process out of the basin.

Two things are needed instead:

  • A uniform version of the deterministic statement, with TTT and δ\deltaδ fixed in advance from the compact set alone. This is Lemma 6.8, which needs local compactness of MMM and the structure of limit sets of asymptotic pseudotrajectories.
  • A probabilistic step that applies (24) at the random time when XXX first enters UUU. That time is not a stopping time on a continuum, and conditioning at it needs care.

A naive union bound over all times is useless: it does not use the conditional form of (24).

Formalization scope

  • The semiflow is Mathlib's Flow ℝ≥0 M on a metric space; local compactness is LocallyCompactSpace M.
  • The process is X : ℝ≥0 → Ω → M with continuous paths. The paper's alternative of càdlàg paths is not covered.
  • Adaptedness is Borel measurability of X(t)X(t)X(t) with respect to Ft\mathcal F_tFt​, for a Mathlib Filtration ℝ≥0. PPP is a probability measure.
  • The suprema in (24) and in dX(T)d_X(T)dX​(T) are computed in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] with the extended distance, so that "sup ≥δ\ge\delta≥δ" and "sup <δ<\delta<δ" are exact even when the supremum is infinite or not attained.
  • The conditional probability in (24) is the conditional expectation of the indicator of the event. The event is required to be measurable, so the condition cannot hold vacuously through a junk conditional expectation.
  • www is required to be both nonincreasing in ttt and convergent to 000.
  • The events {L(X)⊂A}\{L(X)\subset A\}{L(X)⊂A} and {∃s≥t:X(s)∈U}\{\exists s\ge t: X(s)\in U\}{∃s≥t:X(s)∈U} are measured with PPP as an outer measure, so no measurability hypothesis is added for them.
  • In the second statement of Theorem 7.3, TTT and δ\deltaδ are chosen before the probability space, the process, www and ttt.
  • Invariance in the definition of an attractor is the equality Φt(A)=A\Phi_t(A)=AΦt​(A)=A, not inclusion.
  • The almost-sure clause of Lemma 7.1 is stated for separable MMM. Without separability it cannot be proved in ordinary set theory.

These choices rule out the trivializing formalizations: a conditional-probability hypothesis that holds vacuously, invariance read as inclusion, constants T,δT,\deltaT,δ that depend on the process or on ttt, and a probability bound www without monotonicity.

A complete development needs:

  • limit sets of asymptotic pseudotrajectories and the fact that an internally chain transitive set meeting the basin of an attractor lies in the attractor (shared with missions 1 and 5 of this series);
  • measurability of path functionals of continuous processes;
  • conditioning on events of the form {τ=tn(k)}\{\tau=t_n(k)\}{τ=tn​(k)} at dyadic times.

The first and second are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions toward either, and alternative proofs of Lemma 6.8, are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of stochastic approximation algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, Springer, 1999, pp. 1–68. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • M. Benaïm, M. W. Hirsch, Asymptotic pseudotrajectories and chain recurrent flows, with applications, Journal of Dynamics and Differential Equations 8 (1996), 141–176. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02218617
  • M. Benaïm, Vertex-reinforced random walks and a conjecture of Pemantle, Annals of Probability 25 (1997), 361–392. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1024404292
  • M. Duflo, Random Iterative Models, Applications of Mathematics 34, Springer, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-662-12880-0
  • H. J. Kushner, D. S. Clark, Stochastic Approximation Methods for Constrained and Unconstrained Systems, Springer, 1978. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4684-9352-8
  • C. Conley, Isolated Invariant Sets and the Morse Index, CBMS Regional Conference Series in Mathematics 38, AMS, 1978. https://doi.org/10.1090/cbms/038
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms 3: Martingale Noise with Bounded q-th Moments and Summable γ_n^(1+q/2) Satisfies Assumption A1 Almost SurelyResearch Paper

Motivation

A stochastic approximation algorithm is a recursion

xn+1−xn=γn+1(F(xn)+Un+1)x_{n+1}-x_n=\gamma_{n+1}\big(F(x_n)+U_{n+1}\big)xn+1​−xn​=γn+1​(F(xn​)+Un+1​)

in Rd\mathbb R^dRd, where FFF is a vector field, γn\gamma_nγn​ are small step sizes and Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​ is noise. Such recursions go back to Robbins and Monro's root-finding scheme (Robbins–Monro 1951) and underlie stochastic gradient descent, temporal-difference learning, adaptive control and learning in games. The ODE method studies them by comparing the iterates with the trajectories of x˙=F(x)\dot x=F(x)x˙=F(x).

Benaïm's lecture notes (Benaïm 1999) organize the ODE method in two steps. A deterministic step, Proposition 4.1, shows that whenever the noise satisfies a condition called A1 (and the iterates are bounded, or FFF is Lipschitz and bounded on a neighbourhood of them), the interpolated process is an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF. A probabilistic step then verifies A1 for concrete noise models. This mission formalizes the first such verification, Proposition 4.2: martingale difference noise with bounded qqq-th moments and step sizes with ∑nγn1+q/2<∞\sum_n\gamma_n^{1+q/2}<\infty∑n​γn1+q/2​<∞. The result is described as a particular case of a general theorem of Métivier and Priouret (1987); the same estimates reappear later in the notes.

Setting

Let {γn}n≥1\{\gamma_n\}_{n\ge1}{γn​}n≥1​ be a deterministic sequence with γn≥0\gamma_n\ge0γn​≥0, ∑nγn=∞\sum_n\gamma_n=\infty∑n​γn​=∞ and γn→0\gamma_n\to0γn​→0 (a step sequence). Put τ0=0\tau_0=0τ0​=0, τn=∑i=1nγi\tau_n=\sum_{i=1}^n\gamma_iτn​=∑i=1n​γi​, and let

m(t)=sup⁡{k≥0: t≥τk}m(t)=\sup\{k\ge0:\ t\ge\tau_k\}m(t)=sup{k≥0: t≥τk​}

be the index of the step that contains time t≥0t\ge0t≥0. For a sequence {Un}n≥1\{U_n\}_{n\ge1}{Un​}n≥1​ define the piecewise constant processes Uˉ(t)=Um(t)+1\bar U(t)=U_{m(t)+1}Uˉ(t)=Um(t)+1​ and γˉ(t)=γm(t)+1\bar\gamma(t)=\gamma_{m(t)+1}γˉ​(t)=γm(t)+1​, so that step n+1n+1n+1 occupies the time interval [τn,τn+1)[\tau_n,\tau_{n+1})[τn​,τn+1​) of length γn+1\gamma_{n+1}γn+1​.

Assumption A1 asks that for every T>0T>0T>0

lim⁡n→∞sup⁡{∥∑i=nk−1γi+1Ui+1∥: k=n+1,…,m(τn+T)}=0,\lim_{n\to\infty}\sup\Big\{\Big\|\sum_{i=n}^{k-1}\gamma_{i+1}U_{i+1}\Big\|:\ k=n+1,\dots,m(\tau_n+T)\Big\}=0,n→∞lim​sup{​i=n∑k−1​γi+1​Ui+1​​: k=n+1,…,m(τn​+T)}=0,

or, in the form the notes call equivalent, lim⁡t→∞Δ(t,T)=0\lim_{t\to\infty}\Delta(t,T)=0limt→∞​Δ(t,T)=0 for every T>0T>0T>0, where

Δ(t,T)=sup⁡0≤h≤T∥∫tt+hUˉ(s) ds∥.\Delta(t,T)=\sup_{0\le h\le T}\Big\|\int_t^{t+h}\bar U(s)\,ds\Big\|.Δ(t,T)=0≤h≤Tsup​​∫tt+h​Uˉ(s)ds​.

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space with a nondecreasing sequence {Fn}\{\mathcal F_n\}{Fn​} of sub-σ\sigmaσ-algebras, and F:Rd→RdF:\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb R^dF:Rd→Rd continuous. A sequence {xn}\{x_n\}{xn​} given by the recursion above is a Robbins–Monro algorithm if γ\gammaγ is deterministic, UnU_nUn​ is Fn\mathcal F_nFn​-measurable, and E(Un+1∣Fn)=0E(U_{n+1}\mid\mathcal F_n)=0E(Un+1​∣Fn​)=0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 4.2

For a Robbins–Monro algorithm and some real q≥2q\ge2q≥2, if

sup⁡nE(∥Un+1∥q)<∞and∑nγn1+q/2<∞,\sup_nE\big(\|U_{n+1}\|^q\big)<\infty\qquad\text{and}\qquad\sum_n\gamma_n^{1+q/2}<\infty,nsup​E(∥Un+1​∥q)<∞andn∑​γn1+q/2​<∞,

then with probability one the realised noise sequence satisfies A1, in both of its forms, simultaneously for all T>0T>0T>0.

Milestones

  1. Eq. (13), an instance of Burkholder's inequality with a universal constant CqC_qCq​:
E{sup⁡n<k≤m(τn+T)∥∑i=nk−1γi+1Ui+1∥q}≤Cq E{[∑i=nm(τn+T)−1γi+12∥Ui+1∥2]q/2}.E\Big\{\sup_{n<k\le m(\tau_n+T)}\Big\|\sum_{i=n}^{k-1}\gamma_{i+1}U_{i+1}\Big\|^q\Big\}\le C_q\,E\Big\{\Big[\sum_{i=n}^{m(\tau_n+T)-1}\gamma_{i+1}^2\|U_{i+1}\|^2\Big]^{q/2}\Big\}.E{n<k≤m(τn​+T)sup​​i=n∑k−1​γi+1​Ui+1​​q}≤Cq​E{[i=n∑m(τn​+T)−1​γi+12​∥Ui+1​∥2]q/2}.
  1. Inequality (14), for finite families with αi≥0\alpha_i\ge0αi​≥0, u>1u>1u>1, 0<δ<10<\delta<10<δ<1:
(∑i∣αiβi∣)u≤(∑iαiδu/(u−1))u−1∑iαi(1−δ)u∣βi∣u.\Big(\sum_i|\alpha_i\beta_i|\Big)^u\le\Big(\sum_i\alpha_i^{\delta u/(u-1)}\Big)^{u-1}\sum_i\alpha_i^{(1-\delta)u}|\beta_i|^u.(i∑​∣αi​βi​∣)u≤(i∑​αiδu/(u−1)​)u−1i∑​αi(1−δ)u​∣βi​∣u.
  1. Eq. (16): for every T>0T>0T>0 there is C(q,T)C(q,T)C(q,T) with E(Δ(t,T)q)≤C(q,T)∫tt+Tγˉq/2(s) dsE(\Delta(t,T)^q)\le C(q,T)\int_t^{t+T}\bar\gamma^{q/2}(s)\,dsE(Δ(t,T)q)≤C(q,T)∫tt+T​γˉ​q/2(s)ds for all t≥0t\ge0t≥0.
  2. Eq. (17): ∑k≥0E(Δ(kT,T)q)<∞\sum_{k\ge0}E(\Delta(kT,T)^q)<\infty∑k≥0​E(Δ(kT,T)q)<∞ for every T>0T>0T>0.
  3. Block comparison: Δ(t,T)≤2Δ(kT,T)+Δ((k+1)T,T)\Delta(t,T)\le2\Delta(kT,T)+\Delta((k+1)T,T)Δ(t,T)≤2Δ(kT,T)+Δ((k+1)T,T) for kT≤t<(k+1)TkT\le t<(k+1)TkT≤t<(k+1)T.

Significance

Proposition 4.2 is the standard sufficient condition under which the ODE method applies to stochastic gradient-type recursions with martingale noise. With q=2q=2q=2 it covers step sizes with ∑γn2<∞\sum\gamma_n^2<\infty∑γn2​<∞ (for example γn=1/n\gamma_n=1/nγn​=1/n) and noise with bounded variance; larger qqq trades stronger moment assumptions for slower decay of the steps, down to ∑γn1+q/2<∞\sum\gamma_n^{1+q/2}<\infty∑γn1+q/2​<∞. Combined with Proposition 4.1 it shows that the interpolated process of a Robbins–Monro algorithm with bounded iterates is almost surely an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF; the limit set theorems of the notes then locate the limit points of the algorithm.

The result is proved in the notes and in the cited literature; it has not, to our knowledge, been machine-checked. A formal proof would supply reusable pieces that Mathlib currently lacks, most notably a Burkholder (or Burkholder–Davis–Gundy) inequality for discrete-time vector martingales in LqL^qLq, and the continuous-time bookkeeping of the step processes Uˉ\bar UUˉ, γˉ\bar\gammaγˉ​ and the noise deviation Δ\DeltaΔ, shared by the other missions of this series.

Difficulty

The obvious argument controls each window by Doob's L2L^2L2 maximal inequality and sums over windows. That works for q=2q=2q=2 only. For q>2q>2q>2 the second moment of the window sums is not summable under ∑γn1+q/2<∞\sum\gamma_n^{1+q/2}<\infty∑γn1+q/2​<∞, and one needs an LqL^qLq maximal inequality whose right-hand side is the q/2q/2q/2-th moment of the square function. That inequality, Burkholder's, is not in Mathlib. Converting the square function into the moment bound requires a Hölder-type inequality with tuned exponents, and passing from the discrete sums to Δ(t,T)\Delta(t,T)Δ(t,T) requires handling partial steps at both ends of [t,t+h][t,t+h][t,t+h]. A second subtlety is that A1 quantifies over all T>0T>0T>0: the almost-sure statement must hold on a single event of full probability for every TTT, not on an event that depends on TTT.

Formalization scope

The space is Rd\mathbb R^dRd as EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d); time is real; qqq is a real number with q≥2q\ge2q≥2, and all powers are real powers of nonnegative quantities. The sequences γ\gammaγ and UUU are indexed by N\mathbb NN, and their values at 000 are unused, as the paper indexes them from 111. The filtration is a Mathlib Filtration ℕ, Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​ is required to be Fn+1\mathcal F_{n+1}Fn+1​-strongly measurable and integrable, and the martingale difference condition is E(Un+1∣Fn)=0E(U_{n+1}\mid\mathcal F_n)=0E(Un+1​∣Fn​)=0 almost surely. Expectations of nonnegative quantities, the suprema in A1 and Δ\DeltaΔ, and the moment bound are taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so no default value of a non-integrable expectation or of an empty supremum can make a statement hold vacuously; the supremum over an empty range of kkk is 000.

The following readings are excluded and are not acceptable formalizations: a moment hypothesis that holds vacuously, a conditional expectation hypothesis on non-integrable noise, the conclusion "for each TTT, A1 holds almost surely" in place of "almost surely, A1 holds for all TTT", and qqq fixed to 222 or restricted to integers.

All hypotheses are satisfiable: U=0U=0U=0, x=0x=0x=0, F=0F=0F=0 and γn=1/n\gamma_n=1/nγn​=1/n with q=2q=2q=2 satisfy every one of them.

Contributions welcome: a general Burkholder inequality for discrete-time martingales in finite-dimensional spaces (reusable well beyond this mission), lemmas on the step processes and Δ\DeltaΔ (measurability, local integrability, additivity), and the proofs of the milestones.

Selected references

  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, Springer, 1999, pp. 1–68. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • M. Benaïm and M. W. Hirsch, Asymptotic pseudotrajectories and chain recurrent flows, with applications, Journal of Dynamics and Differential Equations 8 (1996), 141–176. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02218617
  • M. Métivier and P. Priouret, Théorèmes de convergence presque sûre pour une classe d'algorithmes stochastiques à pas décroissant, Probability Theory and Related Fields 74 (1987), 403–428.
  • D. L. Burkholder, Distribution function inequalities for martingales, Annals of Probability 1 (1973), 19–42. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176997023
  • D. W. Stroock, Probability Theory: An Analytic View, Cambridge University Press, 1993.
  • H. Robbins and S. Monro, A stochastic approximation method, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 22 (1951), 400–407. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729586
  • H. J. Kushner and G. G. Yin, Stochastic Approximation Algorithms and Applications, Springer, 1997.
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms 5: If V(Λ) Has Empty Interior for a Lyapunov Function V, Every Internally Chain Transitive Set Lies in ΛResearch Paper

Motivation

A stochastic approximation algorithm is a recursion xn+1=xn+γn+1(F(xn)+Un+1)x_{n+1}=x_n+\gamma_{n+1}\big(F(x_n)+U_{n+1}\big)xn+1​=xn​+γn+1​(F(xn​)+Un+1​) with decreasing steps γn\gamma_nγn​ and noise UnU_nUn​. Stochastic gradient descent, the Robbins–Monro procedure, reinforcement-learning updates and learning dynamics in games all have this form. The ODE method compares such a recursion with the deterministic dynamics x˙=F(x)\dot x=F(x)x˙=F(x). Benaïm's lecture notes (Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, 1999) do this in two steps. First, the limit set of the interpolated process is internally chain transitive for the semiflow of FFF (Theorem 5.7, the subject of mission 1 of this series). Second, internally chain transitive sets are located using properties of the dynamics alone.

The most common tool in the second step is a Lyapounov function: a function that decreases strictly along every trajectory outside a set Λ\LambdaΛ and is constant on Λ\LambdaΛ. Proposition 6.4 of the notes states exactly when such a function forces every internally chain transitive set into Λ\LambdaΛ. It is the step behind the convergence of stochastic gradient algorithms to critical points (Corollary 6.7) and behind convergence results for learning in potential games.

Timeline.

  • Conley (Isolated Invariant Sets and the Morse Index, CBMS 38, 1978) introduced chain recurrence and the attractor–repeller description of it.
  • Benaïm and Hirsch (J. Dyn. Diff. Eq. 8, 1996) identified limit sets of asymptotic pseudotrajectories with internally chain transitive sets.
  • Benaïm (SIAM J. Control Optim. 34, 1996) developed the dynamical-systems approach to stochastic approximation built on these notions.
  • Bowen (J. Differential Equations 18, 1975) characterized chain transitivity by the absence of proper attractors, the content of Proposition 5.3 of the notes.
  • The 1999 notes state the Lyapounov criterion in the form used here, for semiflows on arbitrary metric spaces.

Setting

Let (M,d)(M,d)(M,d) be a metric space, with no compactness or completeness assumed. A semiflow Φ\PhiΦ on MMM is a continuous map R+×M→M\mathbb R_+\times M\to MR+​×M→M, (t,x)↦Φt(x)(t,x)\mapsto\Phi_t(x)(t,x)↦Φt​(x), with Φ0=Id\Phi_0=\mathrm{Id}Φ0​=Id and Φt+s=Φt∘Φs\Phi_{t+s}=\Phi_t\circ\Phi_sΦt+s​=Φt​∘Φs​.

  • A set AAA is invariant if Φt(A)=A\Phi_t(A)=AΦt​(A)=A for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0. For an invariant Λ\LambdaΛ, the restriction Φ∣Λ\Phi|\LambdaΦ∣Λ is the semiflow Φ\PhiΦ acting on Λ\LambdaΛ.
  • For δ,T>0\delta,T>0δ,T>0, a (δ,T)(\delta,T)(δ,T)-pseudo-orbit from aaa to bbb is a list of points y0,…,yky_0,\dots,y_ky0​,…,yk​ (k≥1k\ge1k≥1) and times t0,…,tk−1≥Tt_0,\dots,t_{k-1}\ge Tt0​,…,tk−1​≥T with d(y0,a)<δd(y_0,a)<\deltad(y0​,a)<δ, d(Φtj(yj),yj+1)<δd(\Phi_{t_j}(y_j),y_{j+1})<\deltad(Φtj​​(yj​),yj+1​)<δ for j<kj<kj<k, and yk=by_k=byk​=b.
  • A set LLL is internally chain transitive if it is nonempty, compact and invariant, and for all a,b∈La,b\in La,b∈L and all δ,T>0\delta,T>0δ,T>0 there is a (δ,T)(\delta,T)(δ,T)-pseudo-orbit of Φ∣L\Phi|LΦ∣L, so with every yi∈Ly_i\in Lyi​∈L, from aaa to bbb.
  • An attractor is a nonempty compact invariant set AAA with a neighbourhood WWW on which dist(Φtx,A)→0\mathrm{dist}(\Phi_t x,A)\to0dist(Φt​x,A)→0 uniformly. Its basin is the set of points xxx with dist(Φtx,A)→0\mathrm{dist}(\Phi_t x,A)\to0dist(Φt​x,A)→0.
  • Let Λ⊂M\Lambda\subset MΛ⊂M be compact and invariant. A continuous V:M→RV:M\to\mathbb RV:M→R is a Lyapounov function for Λ\LambdaΛ if t↦V(Φt(x))t\mapsto V(\Phi_t(x))t↦V(Φt​(x)) is constant for x∈Λx\in\Lambdax∈Λ and strictly decreasing for x∉Λx\notin\Lambdax∈/Λ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 6.4

Let Λ\LambdaΛ be compact invariant and VVV a Lyapounov function for Λ\LambdaΛ, and assume that V(Λ)V(\Lambda)V(Λ) has empty interior in R\mathbb RR. Then for every internally chain transitive set LLL,

L⊂ΛandV∣L is constant.L\subset\Lambda\qquad\text{and}\qquad V|_L\ \text{is constant}.L⊂ΛandV∣L​ is constant.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 5.2. If UUU is open with compact closure and ΦT(U‾)⊂U\Phi_T(\overline U)\subset UΦT​(U)⊂U for some T>0T>0T>0, there is an attractor A⊂UA\subset UA⊂U whose basin contains U‾\overline UU.
  2. Proposition 5.3. For nonempty Λ\LambdaΛ: internally chain transitive   ⟺  \iff⟺ connected and internally chain recurrent   ⟺  \iff⟺ compact invariant, and Φ∣Λ\Phi|\LambdaΦ∣Λ has no proper attractor.
  3. The claim of the proof of 6.4. For LLL internally chain transitive and v∗=inf⁡LVv^*=\inf_L Vv∗=infL​V: L∩Λ≠∅L\cap\Lambda\ne\emptysetL∩Λ=∅ and v∗=inf⁡L∩ΛVv^*=\inf_{L\cap\Lambda}Vv∗=infL∩Λ​V.
  4. The sublevel step of the proof of 6.4. For every c>v∗c>v^*c>v∗ with c∉V(Λ)c\notin V(\Lambda)c∈/V(Λ), V<cV<cV<c on all of LLL.

Significance

The result. Proposition 6.4 converts a statement about real numbers, that V(Λ)V(\Lambda)V(Λ) has empty interior, into a statement about dynamics: the chain recurrent behaviour of Φ\PhiΦ is confined to Λ\LambdaΛ. With Theorem 5.7 it gives the following. If Φ\PhiΦ has such a Lyapounov function, then the limit set of any precompact asymptotic pseudotrajectory, in particular of a bounded stochastic approximation process, lies in Λ\LambdaΛ, and VVV is constant on it. When Λ\LambdaΛ is the set of equilibria and V(Λ)V(\Lambda)V(Λ) is Lebesgue-null by Sard's theorem, this is the convergence of stochastic gradient algorithms to connected sets of critical points (Corollary 6.7). Remark 6.5 gives a flow on the circle with a strict Lyapounov function, where the circle itself is internally chain transitive. So the empty-interior hypothesis cannot be removed.

Formalizing it. The result is proved, in the notes and in the earlier literature. No machine-checked version of chain recurrence for semiflows on metric spaces, Conley's attractor lemma, or Bowen's characterization of chain transitive sets is known to us. The mission therefore adds the following:

  • a formal definition layer for these notions on Mathlib's Flow;
  • formal proofs of Lemma 5.2 and Proposition 5.3, which are reused across this series (missions 1 and 6);
  • the Lyapounov criterion itself.

Difficulty

The obvious argument does not work. It runs: VVV decreases along trajectories, so along an orbit in LLL the value of VVV must settle on Λ\LambdaΛ. But points of an internally chain transitive set are joined only by pseudo-orbits. At each of the kkk jumps, VVV may increase by an amount that is small but not controlled in number, so monotonicity of VVV along true trajectories says nothing directly about LLL. Remark 6.5 shows that the conclusion is genuinely false without a condition on V(Λ)V(\Lambda)V(Λ). The difficulty is therefore global: pseudo-orbits that climb back up VVV through many small jumps must be excluded using information about the restricted semiflow Φ∣L\Phi|LΦ∣L as a whole, not the monotonicity of VVV along single trajectories. Milestones 1 and 2 are the general facts about chain transitive sets that this requires, and their own proofs involve compactness and uniform-continuity estimates over arbitrarily long pseudo-orbits.

Formalization scope

  • Representation. MMM is any MetricSpace, and the semiflow is Flow ℝ≥0 M.
  • Invariance is equality Φt(A)=A\Phi_t(A)=AΦt​(A)=A for every ttt, not inclusion.
  • Pseudo-orbits have at least one trajectory piece (k≥1k\ge1k≥1), times ≥T\ge T≥T, an exact endpoint, and, in the internal notions, all their points in the set.
  • Nonemptiness. Internally chain transitive and internally chain recurrent sets are nonempty by definition. Accordingly, Proposition 5.3 assumes Λ≠∅\Lambda\neq\emptysetΛ=∅ and Lemma 5.2 assumes U≠∅U\neq\emptysetU=∅.
  • Lyapounov function. The predicate contains the standing assumptions of its definition: Λ\LambdaΛ is compact and invariant, VVV is continuous, V(Φtx)=V(x)V(\Phi_t x)=V(x)V(Φt​x)=V(x) on Λ\LambdaΛ, and t↦V(Φtx)t\mapsto V(\Phi_t x)t↦V(Φt​x) is strictly antitone off Λ\LambdaΛ.
  • Empty interior is interior (V '' Λ) = ∅ in R\mathbb RR, not countability, finiteness or measure zero.
  • Infima are stated with IsGLB, not a real sInf.

The following formalizations are trivializing and are excluded:

  • chains with no jumps, under which every point is chain recurrent;
  • invariance as inclusion;
  • a non-strict decrease condition, under which constant functions are Lyapounov functions and the goal is false;
  • chains of Φ\PhiΦ that leave LLL, a strictly weaker notion;
  • quantifying only over limit sets instead of every internally chain transitive set.

A complete development needs elementary facts about ω-limit sets of points of a compact invariant set: they are nonempty, compact and invariant. It also needs the attractor construction A=⋂t≥0⋃s≥tΦs(U)‾A=\bigcap_{t\ge0}\overline{\bigcup_{s\ge t}\Phi_s(U)}A=⋂t≥0​⋃s≥t​Φs​(U)​ and the open sets {y:x↪δ,Ty}\{y: x\hookrightarrow_{\delta,T}y\}{y:x↪δ,T​y} used in Proposition 5.3. These are reusable for any work on Conley theory. Contributions of any of these lemmas, or of proofs of the milestones in any order, are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, Springer, 1999, pp. 1–68. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • M. Benaïm, M. W. Hirsch, Asymptotic pseudotrajectories and chain recurrent flows, with applications, J. Dynam. Differential Equations 8 (1996), 141–176. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02218613
  • M. Benaïm, A dynamical system approach to stochastic approximations, SIAM J. Control Optim. 34 (1996), 437–472. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0363012993253534
  • C. Conley, Isolated Invariant Sets and the Morse Index, CBMS Regional Conference Series in Mathematics 38, AMS, 1978. https://doi.org/10.1090/cbms/038
  • R. Bowen, ω-limit sets for Axiom A diffeomorphisms, J. Differential Equations 18 (1975), 333–339. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-0396(75)90065-0
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
Captain: Lucas

Hilbert's 16th Problem for Algebraic Limit Cycles (Llibre's Conjecture)Open Problem

Motivation

The second part of Hilbert's 16th problem (Paris, 1900) asks for the maximal number and the relative position of the limit cycles of a planar polynomial differential system

x˙=P(x,y),y˙=Q(x,y),\dot x = P(x,y),\qquad \dot y = Q(x,y),x˙=P(x,y),y˙​=Q(x,y),

where P,QP,QP,Q are real polynomials of degree at most ddd. Smale listed it in 1998 among the mathematical problems for the next century and remarked that, apart from the Riemann hypothesis, it seems the hardest of Hilbert's problems (Smale 1998). Even for d=2d = 2d=2 it is not known whether the number of limit cycles is uniformly bounded.

J. Llibre's survey Sobre el problema 16 de Hilbert (La Gaceta de la RSME 18 (2015), 543–554) organises the question into seven problems and concentrates on a more tractable restriction: algebraic limit cycles, i.e. limit cycles contained in a real algebraic curve. For this restriction there is an explicit conjecture for the maximal number (Conjecture 1 of the survey, first stated in Llibre–Ramírez–Sadovskaia 2010). This mission formalizes that conjecture as its goal, together with the results of the survey on which it rests.

Timeline (as reported in the survey):

  • 1891–1897 — Poincaré introduces limit cycles and proves finiteness for systems without saddle connections.
  • 1900 — Hilbert poses the 16th problem.
  • 1923 — Dulac claims every polynomial system has finitely many limit cycles; in 1985 Ilyashenko finds a gap.
  • 1957/1959 — Petrovskii and Landis claim H(2)=3H(2)=3H(2)=3 and later find an error; 1979 (Chen–Wang) and 1982 (Shi) give quadratic systems with 4 limit cycles.
  • 1986 — Bamon proves finiteness for quadratic systems; 1991/1992 — Ilyashenko and Écalle independently prove finiteness for all polynomial systems.
  • 2001 — Christopher realises any non-singular algebraic curve's bounded components as hyperbolic limit cycles of a system of the same degree (Christopher 2001).
  • 2004 — Llibre and Rodríguez show every configuration of limit cycles is realisable by algebraic limit cycles (Llibre–Rodríguez 2004).
  • 2007 — Llibre and Zhao give a cubic system with two algebraic limit cycles (Llibre–Zhao 2007).
  • 2010 — Llibre, Ramírez and Sadovskaia bound the number of algebraic limit cycles when all invariant algebraic curves are generic, and state the conjecture.

Setting

A polynomial vector field is a pair V=(P,Q)V = (P, Q)V=(P,Q) of real polynomials in x,yx,yx,y; its degree is max⁡(deg⁡P,deg⁡Q)\max(\deg P, \deg Q)max(degP,degQ). A solution is a differentiable curve γ:R→R2\gamma:\mathbb R\to\mathbb R^2γ:R→R2 with γ′(t)=(P,Q)(γ(t))\gamma'(t) = (P,Q)(\gamma(t))γ′(t)=(P,Q)(γ(t)) for all ttt. A periodic orbit is the image of a non-constant periodic solution. A limit cycle is a periodic orbit OOO that is isolated among periodic orbits: some open set U⊇OU \supseteq OU⊇O contains no periodic orbit other than OOO.

A limit cycle is algebraic if it is contained in the zero set {f=0}\{f = 0\}{f=0} of a non-zero real polynomial fff. The algebraic Hilbert number Ha(d)H_a(d)Ha​(d) is the supremum, over all polynomial vector fields of degree at most ddd, of the number of algebraic limit cycles (a value in N∪{∞}\mathbb N \cup \{\infty\}N∪{∞}).

A curve f=0f = 0f=0 is invariant with cofactor KKK if P fx+Q fy=KfP\,f_x + Q\,f_y = K fPfx​+Qfy​=Kf. A family of irreducible curves is generic if (i) no curve is singular, (ii) the top-degree homogeneous part of each curve is square-free, (iii) distinct curves meet transversally, (iv) no three distinct curves share a point, and (v) the top-degree homogeneous parts of distinct curves are coprime.

Formalization targets

Goal — Conjecture 1 (Llibre–Ramírez–Sadovskaia)

Ha(d)=1+(d−1)(d−2)2(d≥2).H_a(d) = 1 + \frac{(d-1)(d-2)}{2}\qquad (d \ge 2).Ha​(d)=1+2(d−1)(d−2)​(d≥2).

The equality asserts both that the number of algebraic limit cycles is bounded by the right-hand side for every field of degree at most ddd, and that the bound is attained.

Milestones (in the order of the survey)

  1. §2, Problem 1 — every polynomial vector field has finitely many limit cycles (Écalle, Ilyashenko).
  2. §3 — H(1)=0H(1) = 0H(1)=0: vector fields of degree at most 111 have no limit cycles.
  3. Theorem 1(a),(b) — every configuration of limit cycles is realised, and realised by algebraic limit cycles in degree ≤2(n+r)−1\le 2(n+r)-1≤2(n+r)−1.
  4. Theorem 2 (Christopher) — the bounded components of a non-singular curve f=0f = 0f=0 are exactly the limit cycles, all hyperbolic, of x˙=αf−Dfy\dot x = \alpha f - D f_yx˙=αf−Dfy​, y˙=βf+Dfx\dot y = \beta f + D f_xy˙​=βf+Dfx​.
  5. Proposition 3 — invariance of fff is equivalent to invariance of its irreducible factors, with Kf=∑niKfiK_f = \sum n_i K_{f_i}Kf​=∑ni​Kfi​​.
  6. Theorem 4(a),(b) — for degree d≥2d \ge 2d≥2 and generic invariant curves, at most 1+(d−1)(d−2)21 + \frac{(d-1)(d-2)}{2}1+2(d−1)(d−2)​ (even ddd) or (d−1)(d−2)2\frac{(d-1)(d-2)}{2}2(d−1)(d−2)​ (odd ddd) algebraic limit cycles, and the bounds are attained.
  7. §7 example — the cubic system x˙=2y(10+xy)\dot x = 2y(10+xy)x˙=2y(10+xy), y˙=20x+y−20x3−2x2y+4y3\dot y = 20x + y - 20x^3 - 2x^2 y + 4y^3y˙​=20x+y−20x3−2x2y+4y3 has two algebraic limit cycles in 2x4−4x2+4y2+1=02x^4 - 4x^2 + 4y^2 + 1 = 02x4−4x2+4y2+1=0.
  8. Conjecture 2 — Ha(2)=1H_a(2) = 1Ha​(2)=1.
  9. Theorem 5 (Giacomini–Llibre–Viano) — an inverse integrating factor vanishes on every limit cycle.

Significance

A proof of the goal would settle Problems 6 and 7 of the survey: it would give a uniform bound, depending only on the degree, for the number of algebraic limit cycles, and identify the sharp value. The conjecture is consistent with every example known to the survey: the generic bound of Theorem 4 is sharp for even ddd, and the known non-generic examples exceed the generic bound only in odd degree and by one. Conjecture 2 (d=2d = 2d=2) is its first open case.

On the formal side, the milestones require a reusable library of planar dynamics that is currently absent from Mathlib: periodic orbits and limit cycles of planar vector fields, hyperbolicity via the divergence integral, inverse integrating factors, invariant algebraic curves and Darboux-type arguments, and topological configurations of Jordan curves. Theorems 1, 2, 4 and 5, Proposition 3 and the cubic example are proved in the literature but, as far as the proposal author knows, not formalized; the goal and Conjecture 2 are open.

Difficulty

The obvious route bounds the number of ovals of the invariant curve (Harnack's theorem) and relates the degree of the curve to the degree of the field. This fails because a field of degree ddd can have invariant curves of arbitrarily high degree, so no a-priori degree bound on the curve is available; Theorem 4 obtains one only under the genericity conditions (i)–(v), and the degree-3 example shows that non-generic curves behave differently. On the formal side, the dynamical milestones (Theorems 2 and 5, the cubic example) need Poincaré–Bendixson-type planar topology and uniqueness of solutions, which Mathlib does not yet provide.

Formalization scope

  • Polynomials are MvPolynomial (Fin 2) ℝ with variable 0 as xxx and 1 as yyy; points are ℝ × ℝ. The degree of a field is the maximum of the total degrees of PPP and QQQ, and Ha(d)H_a(d)Ha​(d) ranges over fields of degree at most ddd, matching equation (1) of the survey.
  • Counts of limit cycles are Set.encard values in ℕ∞, so an infinite family is ∞\infty∞, never silently 000; Ha(d)H_a(d)Ha​(d) is an iSup in ℕ∞, so the goal also asserts finiteness.
  • Solutions are global (HasDerivAt at every real time). A limit cycle is isolated among periodic orbits contained in a neighbourhood. An algebraic limit cycle lies in the zero set of some non-zero polynomial, with no degree restriction on the curve.
  • Genericity conditions (i), (iii), (iv) are imposed at complex points of C2\mathbb C^2C2; (ii), (v) use square-freeness and coprimality in R[x,y]\mathbb R[x,y]R[x,y]; "distinct curves" means non-associated polynomials.
  • Hyperbolicity of a limit cycle is encoded by a non-zero divergence integral over one period.
  • Theorem 1(b) is formalized without its final sentence (existence of a Darboux first integral).
  • Trivializing encodings are ruled out: algebraic limit cycles require a non-zero polynomial, and the conjecture is an equality in ℕ∞, not an inequality over a possibly empty family.

Contributions welcome: a planar ODE library (uniqueness, flows, Poincaré–Bendixson), Darboux theory of integrability, and proofs of the classical milestones.

Selected references

  • J. Llibre, Sobre el problema 16 de Hilbert, La Gaceta de la RSME 18 (2015), no. 3, 543–554 (source of this mission).
  • J. Llibre, R. Ramírez, N. Sadovskaia, On the 16th Hilbert problem for algebraic limit cycles, J. Differential Equations 248 (2010), 1401–1409. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jde.2009.11.023
  • J. Llibre, G. Rodríguez, Configurations of limit cycles and planar polynomial vector fields, J. Differential Equations 198 (2004), 374–380. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jde.2003.10.008
  • C. Christopher, Polynomial vector fields with prescribed algebraic limit cycles, Geom. Dedicata 88 (2001), 255–258. https://doi.org/10.1023/a:1013171019668
  • H. Giacomini, J. Llibre, M. Viano, On the nonexistence, existence and uniqueness of limit cycles, Nonlinearity 9 (1996), 501–516. https://doi.org/10.1088/0951-7715/9/2/013
  • J. Llibre, Y. Zhao, Algebraic limit cycles in polynomial systems of differential equations, J. Phys. A 40 (2007), 14207–14222. https://doi.org/10.1088/1751-8113/40/47/012
  • Yu. Ilyashenko, Centennial history of Hilbert's 16th problem, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 39 (2002), 301–354. https://doi.org/10.1090/s0273-0979-02-00946-1
  • S. Smale, Mathematical problems for the next century, Math. Intelligencer 20 (1998), no. 2, 7–15. https://doi.org/10.1007/bf03025291
15 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Topology·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems XI: The Smale HorseshoeTextbook

Why the horseshoe

The Smale horseshoe is the standard example of a smooth invertible map of the plane with chaotic dynamics. Smale introduced it in the 1960s as the mechanism behind the complicated orbits near a transverse homoclinic point, and it became the basic model of hyperbolic invariant sets (Smale 1967). Its importance for differential equations is the Smale–Birkhoff theorem: whenever the stable and unstable manifolds of a hyperbolic fixed point intersect transversally, some iterate of the map contains a horseshoe. Melnikov's method then turns this into a checkable criterion for chaos in periodically forced planar systems such as Duffing's equation.

This mission formalizes the horseshoe as it is treated in Chapter 13 of G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (author's preliminary version of AMS GSM 140, 2012). It takes along the one-dimensional results from §§11.4–11.5 that the chapter's argument reuses: the tent map's Cantor set, the one-sided shift, and the metric on two-sided sequences.

Setting

Fix parameters λ\lambdaλ and μ\muμ and let D=[0,1]2D = [0,1]^2D=[0,1]2. The two horizontal strips

J0=[0,1]×[0,1/μ],J1=[0,1]×[1−1/μ,1]J_0 = [0,1] \times [0, 1/\mu], \qquad J_1 = [0,1] \times [1 - 1/\mu, 1]J0​=[0,1]×[0,1/μ],J1​=[0,1]×[1−1/μ,1]

are mapped by

F(x,y)=(λx,μy) on J0,F(x,y)=(1−λx,μ(1−y)) on J1.F(x,y) = (\lambda x, \mu y) \text{ on } J_0, \qquad F(x,y) = (1 - \lambda x, \mu(1-y)) \text{ on } J_1 .F(x,y)=(λx,μy) on J0​,F(x,y)=(1−λx,μ(1−y)) on J1​.

Each strip is contracted horizontally by λ\lambdaλ and stretched vertically by μ\muμ into a vertical strip crossing DDD. The book specifies FFF only on J0∪J1J_0 \cup J_1J0​∪J1​ and leaves the fold between them to a picture. A horseshoe map here is any F:R2→R2F : \mathbb{R}^2 \to \mathbb{R}^2F:R2→R2 given by these formulas on J0∪J1J_0 \cup J_1J0​∪J1​. On K0=F(J0)=[0,λ]×[0,1]K_0 = F(J_0) = [0, \lambda] \times [0,1]K0​=F(J0​)=[0,λ]×[0,1] and K1=F(J1)=[1−λ,1]×[0,1]K_1 = F(J_1) = [1-\lambda, 1] \times [0,1]K1​=F(J1​)=[1−λ,1]×[0,1] the inverse ggg is given by explicit formulas.

The tent map Tν(x)=ν2(1−∣2x−1∣)T_\nu(x) = \frac{\nu}{2}(1 - |2x-1|)Tν​(x)=2ν​(1−∣2x−1∣) on R\mathbb{R}R has the invariant set

Λ(Tν)={x∈R:Tνn(x)∈[0,1] for all n≥0}.\Lambda(T_\nu) = \{x \in \mathbb{R} : T_\nu^n(x) \in [0,1] \text{ for all } n \ge 0\}.Λ(Tν​)={x∈R:Tνn​(x)∈[0,1] for all n≥0}.

The second coordinate of FFF is Tμ(y)T_\mu(y)Tμ​(y) and the first coordinate of ggg is T1/λ(x)T_{1/\lambda}(x)T1/λ​(x). The horseshoe's invariant set is

Λ=Λ(T1/λ)×Λ(Tμ).\Lambda = \Lambda(T_{1/\lambda}) \times \Lambda(T_\mu).Λ=Λ(T1/λ​)×Λ(Tμ​).

The two-sided shift space is Σ2={0,1}Z\Sigma_2 = \{0,1\}^{\mathbb{Z}}Σ2​={0,1}Z. It carries the metric

d(s,t)=12∑n≥0∣sn−tn∣+∣s−n−t−n∣2nd(s,t) = \tfrac12 \sum_{n \ge 0} \frac{|s_n - t_n| + |s_{-n} - t_{-n}|}{2^n}d(s,t)=21​n≥0∑​2n∣sn​−tn​∣+∣s−n​−t−n​∣​

and the shift σ(s)n=sn+1\sigma(s)_n = s_{n+1}σ(s)n​=sn+1​. The itinerary φ(x,y)∈Σ2\varphi(x,y) \in \Sigma_2φ(x,y)∈Σ2​ of a point of Λ\LambdaΛ records, for n≥0n \ge 0n≥0, which strip JynJ_{y_n}Jyn​​ contains Fn(x,y)F^n(x,y)Fn(x,y). For n<0n < 0n<0 it records which strip Kx−n−1K_{x_{-n-1}}Kx−n−1​​ contains g−n−1(x,y)g^{-n-1}(x,y)g−n−1(x,y).

A system (M,f)(M, f)(M,f) is chaotic in the book's sense (p. 296) under four conditions: fff is continuous, MMM is infinite, fff is topologically transitive (for nonempty open U,VU, VU,V some fn(U)f^n(U)fn(U) meets VVV), and the periodic points are dense. A Cantor set is a compact, perfect, totally disconnected set.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 13.1 (p. 333)

For 0<λ<120 < \lambda < \tfrac120<λ<21​, μ>2\mu > 2μ>2 and every horseshoe map FFF:

Λ is a Cantor set,F(Λ)=Λ,φ:Λ→Σ2 is a homeomorphism with σ∘φ=φ∘F on Λ,\Lambda \text{ is a Cantor set}, \quad F(\Lambda) = \Lambda, \quad \varphi : \Lambda \to \Sigma_2 \text{ is a homeomorphism with } \sigma \circ \varphi = \varphi \circ F \text{ on } \Lambda,Λ is a Cantor set,F(Λ)=Λ,φ:Λ→Σ2​ is a homeomorphism with σ∘φ=φ∘F on Λ, and (Λ,F∣Λ) is chaotic.\text{and } (\Lambda, F|_\Lambda) \text{ is chaotic.}and (Λ,F∣Λ​) is chaotic.

The book's sentence is: "The Smale horseshoe map has an invariant Cantor set Λ\LambdaΛ on which the dynamics is equivalent to the double sided shift on two symbols. In particular it is chaotic."

Milestones, in attack order

  • Lemma 11.15 (p. 306). On two-sided sequences, d(s,t)≤N−nd(s,t) \le N^{-n}d(s,t)≤N−n when s,ts, ts,t agree on ∣j∣≤n|j| \le n∣j∣≤n, and d(s,t)d(s,t)d(s,t) is bounded below by a multiple of N−nN^{-n}N−n when they differ at some ∣j∣≤n|j| \le n∣j∣≤n.
  • Lemma 11.8 (p. 303). The one-sided shift on ΣN={0,…,N−1}N0\Sigma_N = \{0, \dots, N-1\}^{\mathbb{N}_0}ΣN​={0,…,N−1}N0​ has countably many periodic points, and they are dense.
  • Lemma 11.9 (p. 303). The one-sided shift has a dense forward orbit.
  • Lemma 11.4 (p. 299). For ν>2\nu > 2ν>2, Λ(Tν)\Lambda(T_\nu)Λ(Tν​) is a Cantor set.
  • Theorem 11.5 (p. 301). For ν>2\nu > 2ν>2, the itinerary map conjugates (Λ(Tν),Tν)(\Lambda(T_\nu), T_\nu)(Λ(Tν​),Tν​) to the one-sided shift on {0,1}N0\{0,1\}^{\mathbb{N}_0}{0,1}N0​ by a homeomorphism.

Significance

Theorem 13.1 exhibits a two-dimensional invertible system with an explicit invariant set on which the dynamics is exactly the two-sided shift. Every property of the shift is then inherited:

  • infinitely many periodic orbits of every period;
  • a dense orbit;
  • sensitive dependence (Lemma 11.3);
  • orbits with any prescribed forward and backward itinerary.

Theorem 13.1 is the model to which the Smale–Birkhoff theorem (13.2) reduces the dynamics near a transverse homoclinic point. It is therefore the terminal object of the book's route from Melnikov integrals to chaos in forced oscillators.

The results are classical and fully proved in the literature. Their proofs have not been formalized. Mathlib has Cantor-type sets (the middle-thirds set), totally disconnected and perfect sets, and product topologies. It has no tent-map invariant set, no two-sided symbolic dynamics with the book's metric, and no conjugacy theorem of this kind. A formal proof would supply a machine-checked conjugacy between a concrete planar map and a full shift, together with the symbolic-dynamics layer it rests on.

Difficulty

The book's own argument for Theorem 13.1 has two gaps that a formal proof must fill. First, it asserts that a product of two Cantor sets is again a Cantor set and leaves this as an exercise. Second, it treats continuity of the itinerary map and of its inverse as an exercise. It also leans on "all other results hold with no further modifications" to transfer the one-sided lemmas (11.7–11.9) to the two-sided shift.

The two-sided transfer is not literally a restatement. The metric (11.35) weights each off-centre index by 12\tfrac1221​, and so the one-sided closeness estimate does not carry over verbatim; see the correction to Lemma 11.15 below.

The inverse ggg must also be tracked alongside FFF. The negative half of the itinerary is defined through ggg rather than through FFF, so the conjugacy at index −1-1−1 couples the two halves.

Finally, the parameter endpoints need care. The book allows λ=12\lambda = \tfrac12λ=21​ and μ=2\mu = 2μ=2. At μ=2\mu = 2μ=2 the defining formulas are inconsistent on y=12y = \tfrac12y=21​, and at either endpoint one factor of Λ\LambdaΛ is the whole interval [0,1][0,1][0,1].

Formalization scope

  • Parameters. The goal is stated for 0<λ<120 < \lambda < \tfrac120<λ<21​ and μ>2\mu > 2μ>2, a correction of the book's closed endpoints recorded in the statement.
  • Lemma 11.15 is stated with the lower bound 12N−n\tfrac12 N^{-n}21​N−n instead of the printed N−nN^{-n}N−n. The printed bound fails for the metric (11.35): for N=2N = 2N=2, n=1n = 1n=1 and sequences differing only at index 111, d=14d = \tfrac14d=41​. The first clause is as printed.
  • The map. IsHorseshoeMap λ μ F is a predicate fixing FFF only on J0∪J1J_0 \cup J_1J0​∪J1​, and the goal quantifies over all such FFF. Its conclusion therefore cannot depend on how the fold is drawn. The inverse horseshoeInv is the explicit formula (13.5)–(13.6).
  • Spaces. R2\mathbb{R}^2R2 is ℝ × ℝ; its max-distance has the Euclidean topology. Sequence spaces are ℕ → Fin N and ℤ → Fin N. The metrics (11.28) and (11.35) are functions symDist and symDistZ, not type-class instances. Density and continuity are stated in ε\varepsilonε–δ\deltaδ form against them, so no unmentioned product topology enters.
  • Topological equivalence is spelled out: FFF maps Λ\LambdaΛ onto Λ\LambdaΛ, φ\varphiφ is a bijection Λ→Σ2\Lambda \to \Sigma_2Λ→Σ2​, σ∘φ=φ∘F\sigma \circ \varphi = \varphi \circ Fσ∘φ=φ∘F on Λ\LambdaΛ, and φ\varphiφ, φ−1\varphi^{-1}φ−1 are continuous.
  • Chaos is the book's definition (continuous, infinite, transitive, dense periodic points), applied to FFF restricted to the subtype Λ\LambdaΛ. It is not the three-axiom definition with sensitive dependence.
  • Cantor set means compact, Preperfect and IsTotallySeparated, the last being the book's definition of total disconnectedness on p. 302.

Λ\LambdaΛ is constructed as in (13.8) and φ\varphiφ as in (13.9), not quantified over. The goal asserts the full conjunction, so it cannot be discharged by exhibiting some other invariant set or some other conjugacy. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2 maps satisfying IsHorseshoeMap exist, so the hypothesis is not vacuous.

A complete development needs:

  • the product of Cantor sets in a product of metric spaces;
  • the tent-map coding (Theorem 11.5) for both TμT_\muTμ​ and T1/λT_{1/\lambda}T1/λ​;
  • the two-sided shift's Cantor, periodic-point and transitivity properties;
  • transport of chaos along a conjugacy.

The tent-map and one-sided shift lemmas duplicate those of the interval-maps mission of this series and are reusable there. Contributions proving the two-sided analogues of Lemmas 11.7–11.9 as auxiliary lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, AMS, 2012. Author's preliminary version: https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf
  • S. Smale, Differentiable dynamical systems, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 73 (1967), 747–817. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9904-1967-11798-1
  • R. L. Devaney, An Introduction to Chaotic Dynamical Systems, 2nd ed., Addison-Wesley, 1989.
  • C. Robinson, Dynamical Systems: Stability, Symbolic Dynamics, and Chaos, 2nd ed., CRC Press, 1999.
20 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems X: Periodic Orbits and the Poincaré MapTextbook

Motivation

Periodic solutions are the simplest non-stationary long-time behaviour of an autonomous system x˙=f(x)\dot x = f(x)x˙=f(x): limit cycles in oscillators and population models, closed orbits of conservative systems. The first question about a periodic orbit is whether it is stable. Poincaré introduced the first-return map on a transversal section, which turns this question into a question about a fixed point of a map in one dimension less. Floquet theory attacks the same question through the linear periodic system obtained by linearizing along the orbit. This mission formalizes Chapter 12, §§12.1–12.2 of G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012; author's preliminary version, DOI of the published book). That chapter proves the two approaches agree and derives the standard stability and persistence criteria from this.

Setting

Let M⊆RnM \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nM⊆Rn be open, f∈Ck(M,Rn)f \in C^k(M, \mathbb{R}^n)f∈Ck(M,Rn) with k≥1k \ge 1k≥1, and let Φ(t,x)\Phi(t, x)Φ(t,x) be the flow of x˙=f(x)\dot x = f(x)x˙=f(x) with maximal intervals IxI_xIx​: t↦Φ(t,x)t \mapsto \Phi(t,x)t↦Φ(t,x) is the unique maximal solution with Φ(0,x)=x\Phi(0,x) = xΦ(0,x)=x. A point x0∈Mx_0 \in Mx0​∈M is periodic with period T>0T > 0T>0 if Φ(T,x0)=x0\Phi(T, x_0) = x_0Φ(T,x0​)=x0​ and Φ(t,x0)≠x0\Phi(t, x_0) \neq x_0Φ(t,x0​)=x0​ for 0<t<T0 < t < T0<t<T. Its orbit γ(x0)={Φ(t,x0)}\gamma(x_0) = \{\Phi(t, x_0)\}γ(x0​)={Φ(t,x0​)} is then a closed curve.

Linearization along the orbit. Put A(t)=dfΦ(t,x0)A(t) = df_{\Phi(t, x_0)}A(t)=dfΦ(t,x0​)​, a TTT-periodic matrix. The first variational equation is y˙=A(t)y\dot y = A(t) yy˙​=A(t)y, and Πx0(t,t0)\Pi_{x_0}(t, t_0)Πx0​​(t,t0​) denotes its principal matrix solution: ∂tΠ=A(t)Π\partial_t \Pi = A(t)\Pi∂t​Π=A(t)Π, Π(t0,t0)=I\Pi(t_0, t_0) = \mathbb{I}Π(t0​,t0​)=I. The monodromy matrix based at Φ(t0,x0)\Phi(t_0,x_0)Φ(t0​,x0​) is

Mx0(t0)=∂ΦT∂x(Φ(t0,x0)).M_{x_0}(t_0) = \frac{\partial \Phi_T}{\partial x}\big(\Phi(t_0, x_0)\big).Mx0​​(t0​)=∂x∂ΦT​​(Φ(t0​,x0​)).

The Poincaré map. A transversal section is Σ={x∈U∣S(x)=0}\Sigma = \{x \in U \mid S(x) = 0\}Σ={x∈U∣S(x)=0} with UUU open, S∈Ck(U)S \in C^k(U)S∈Ck(U), ∂S/∂x≠0\partial S/\partial x \ne 0∂S/∂x=0 and (∂S/∂x) f≠0(\partial S/\partial x)\, f \neq 0(∂S/∂x)f=0 on Σ\SigmaΣ. If x0∈Σx_0 \in \Sigmax0​∈Σ there is a CkC^kCk return time τ\tauτ near x0x_0x0​ with τ(x0)=T\tau(x_0) = Tτ(x0​)=T and Φ(τ(y),y)∈Σ\Phi(\tau(y), y) \in \SigmaΦ(τ(y),y)∈Σ. The Poincaré map is

PΣ(y)=Φ(τ(y),y).P_\Sigma(y) = \Phi(\tau(y), y).PΣ​(y)=Φ(τ(y),y).

Its derivative dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) is a linear map of the (n−1)(n-1)(n−1)-dimensional tangent space Tx0Σ=ker⁡∂S∂x(x0)T_{x_0}\Sigma = \ker \frac{\partial S}{\partial x}(x_0)Tx0​​Σ=ker∂x∂S​(x0​) into itself.

Stability. The orbit γ\gammaγ is stable if every neighborhood UUU of γ\gammaγ contains a neighborhood VVV of γ\gammaγ from which solutions stay in UUU for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. It is asymptotically stable if moreover d(Φ(t,x),γ)→0d(\Phi(t,x), \gamma) \to 0d(Φ(t,x),γ)→0 for all xxx in some neighborhood of γ\gammaγ. A periodic orbit is hyperbolic if dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) has no eigenvalue on the unit circle.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 12.4

For every t0∈Rt_0 \in \mathbb{R}t0​∈R,

χMx0(t0)(X)=(X−1) χdPΣ(x0)(X),\chi_{M_{x_0}(t_0)}(X) = (X - 1)\,\chi_{dP_\Sigma(x_0)}(X),χMx0​​(t0​)​(X)=(X−1)χdPΣ​(x0​)​(X),

where χ\chiχ is the characteristic polynomial. So the eigenvalues of dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) together with the single value 111 are exactly the eigenvalues of the monodromy matrix, with multiplicities. In particular they depend neither on the section Σ\SigmaΣ nor on the base point on the orbit.

Milestones

  • Lemma 12.1. Πx0(t,t0)=∂Φt−t0∂x(Φ(t0,x0))\Pi_{x_0}(t,t_0) = \frac{\partial\Phi_{t-t_0}}{\partial x}(\Phi(t_0,x_0))Πx0​​(t,t0​)=∂x∂Φt−t0​​​(Φ(t0​,x0​)), and f(Φ(t,x0))=Πx0(t,t0)f(Φ(t0,x0))f(\Phi(t,x_0)) = \Pi_{x_0}(t,t_0) f(\Phi(t_0,x_0))f(Φ(t,x0​))=Πx0​​(t,t0​)f(Φ(t0​,x0​)).
  • Corollary 12.3. If every eigenvalue of dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) has modulus <1< 1<1, then γ(x0)\gamma(x_0)γ(x0​) is asymptotically stable.
  • Corollary 12.5. det⁡dPΣ(x0)=det⁡Mx0(t0)≠0\det dP_\Sigma(x_0) = \det M_{x_0}(t_0) \neq 0detdPΣ​(x0​)=detMx0​​(t0​)=0, and PΣP_\SigmaPΣ​ is a local CkC^kCk diffeomorphism of Σ\SigmaΣ at x0x_0x0​.
  • Lemma 12.6. For n=2n = 2n=2, γ(x0)\gamma(x_0)γ(x0​) is asymptotically stable if ∫0Tdiv⁡f(Φ(t,x0)) dt<0\int_0^T \operatorname{div} f(\Phi(t,x_0))\,dt < 0∫0T​divf(Φ(t,x0​))dt<0 and unstable if the integral is positive.
  • Lemma 12.7. If f(x,0)f(x,0)f(x,0) has a hyperbolic periodic orbit through x0x_0x0​ and f(x,μ)f(x,\mu)f(x,μ) is CkC^kCk, then on a neighborhood of μ=0\mu = 0μ=0 there is a CkC^kCk family x0(μ)x_0(\mu)x0​(μ) with x0(0)=x0x_0(0) = x_0x0​(0)=x0​ and each x0(μ)x_0(\mu)x0​(μ) periodic for f(⋅,μ)f(\cdot,\mu)f(⋅,μ).

Significance

The result. Theorem 12.4 is the bridge between the two standard tools for periodic orbits. The Floquet multipliers of y˙=A(t)y\dot y = A(t)yy˙​=A(t)y can often be computed or estimated, for instance through Liouville's formula det⁡Mx0(t0)=exp⁡∫0Tdiv⁡f(Φ(t,x0)) dt\det M_{x_0}(t_0) = \exp\int_0^T \operatorname{div} f(\Phi(t,x_0))\,dtdetMx0​​(t0​)=exp∫0T​divf(Φ(t,x0​))dt. The Poincaré map is where the dynamics is decided, for instance through the fixed-point stability theory of maps. Corollaries 12.3 and 12.5 and Lemma 12.6 are the resulting stability tests. Lemma 12.7 is the structural-stability statement for hyperbolic orbits that bifurcation theory starts from. Theorems 12.8–12.10 (stable manifolds of periodic orbits) build on the same objects.

Formalizing it. All results are classical and proved in the book. None has a machine-checked proof on the platform or, as far as is known, in Mathlib, which has neither Poincaré maps nor the linearization of flows along orbits. The work is a formalization of the known proofs. It needs differentiability of the flow with respect to initial conditions, and that part is reusable across the whole of qualitative ODE theory.

Difficulty

The algebra of Theorem 12.4 is short. The two linear maps act on different spaces: Mx0(0)M_{x_0}(0)Mx0​​(0) on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, and dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) on the hyperplane Tx0ΣT_{x_0}\SigmaTx0​​Σ. That hyperplane is in general not orthogonal to f(x0)f(x_0)f(x0​), not a coordinate hyperplane, and not invariant under Mx0(0)M_{x_0}(0)Mx0​​(0). Any comparison has to go through the derivative of y↦Φ(τ(y),y)y \mapsto \Phi(\tau(y), y)y↦Φ(τ(y),y), which involves the derivative of the implicitly defined return time. Behind all this sits the differentiability of Φ\PhiΦ in xxx and the variational equation it satisfies, which Mathlib does not provide for local flows. For the stability milestones, the delicate step is passing from the discrete iterates of PΣP_\SigmaPΣ​ on Σ\SigmaΣ back to the continuous flow near the whole orbit. That requires uniform control over one period.

Formalization scope

The state space is Fin n → ℝ. Norm-dependent notions (distance to the orbit, neighborhoods) do not depend on the choice of norm. The flow is local: IsMaximalFlow f M I Φ characterizes Φ\PhiΦ and IxI_xIx​ by maximality and uniqueness, and Φ\PhiΦ's values outside its domain are never used. Derivatives are Mathlib's fderiv. The section Σ\SigmaΣ is the book's general {S=0}\{S = 0\}{S=0} with (∂S/∂x)f≠0(\partial S/\partial x)f \neq 0(∂S/∂x)f=0, not a hyperplane chosen orthogonal to f(x0)f(x_0)f(x0​). The return time τ\tauτ is any CkC^kCk function on a neighborhood of x0x_0x0​ with τ(x0)=T\tau(x_0) = Tτ(x0​)=T and Φ(τ(y),y)∈Σ\Phi(\tau(y),y) \in \SigmaΦ(τ(y),y)∈Σ; such a function agrees with the book's τ\tauτ near x0x_0x0​. dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) is an endomorphism L of LinearMap.ker (fderiv ℝ S x₀) that agrees with the derivative of y↦Φ(τ(y),y)y \mapsto \Phi(\tau(y), y)y↦Φ(τ(y),y) there (IsPoincareDerivative). Theorems 12.4 and 12.5 assert that it exists. Eigenvalues are complex roots of characteristic polynomials.

Conventions and readings:

  • The goal compares characteristic polynomials, so multiplicities count. Equality of eigenvalue sets, a statement at a single convenient t0t_0t0​, or a hyperplane section would each be weaker than the book's theorem and do not count as solving the goal.
  • The monodromy matrix is ∂ΦT∂x(Φ(t0,x0))\frac{\partial\Phi_T}{\partial x}(\Phi(t_0,x_0))∂x∂ΦT​​(Φ(t0​,x0​)). The book prints ΦT−t0\Phi_{T-t_0}ΦT−t0​​ on p. 316, a typo inconsistent with (12.5) and (12.8).
  • "Periodic orbit" means positive least period. Fixed points are excluded, since there is no transversal section through them. In dimension n≤1n \le 1n≤1 no such orbit exists, and the statements are vacuous there as in the book.
  • "Hyperbolic periodic orbit" is not defined in the preliminary version. The definition used is the one the proof of Lemma 12.7 uses: no eigenvalue of dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) on the unit circle, for some transversal section.
  • Lemma 12.7: "in a sufficiently small neighborhood of 000" is read as: there exists an open W∋0W \ni 0W∋0 inside the parameter set on which x0(⋅)x_0(\cdot)x0​(⋅) is CkC^kCk. The parameter lies in Rp\mathbb{R}^pRp.
  • Corollary 12.5: "local diffeomorphism at x0x_0x0​" is read as: PΣP_\SigmaPΣ​ maps W∩ΣW \cap \SigmaW∩Σ bijectively onto W′∩ΣW' \cap \SigmaW′∩Σ for open W,W′∋x0W, W' \ni x_0W,W′∋x0​, with an inverse that is the restriction of a CkC^kCk map on W′W'W′.
  • (12.1) is stated for all xxx in a neighborhood of the orbit. The book writes U(x0)U(x_0)U(x0​) right after introducing U(γ(x0))U(\gamma(x_0))U(γ(x0​)).

Needed infrastructure: existence, uniqueness and CkC^kCk dependence on initial conditions for local flows; the implicit function theorem (Mathlib); characteristic polynomials and determinants of endomorphisms of finite-dimensional subspaces (Mathlib); Liouville's formula; stability of fixed points of C1C^1C1 maps with contracting linearization. Contributions of any of these as standalone lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, AMS, 2012. https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/140 (preliminary version: https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf)
  • H. Poincaré, Mémoire sur les courbes définies par une équation différentielle, J. Math. Pures Appl. (3) 7 (1881) 375–422. http://www.numdam.org/item/JMPA_1881_3_7__375_0/
  • G. Floquet, Sur les équations différentielles linéaires à coefficients périodiques, Ann. Sci. ÉNS (2) 12 (1883) 47–88. https://doi.org/10.24033/asens.220
  • P. Hartman, Ordinary Differential Equations, 2nd ed., SIAM Classics in Applied Mathematics 38, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898719222
22 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems IX: Interval Maps, Symbolic Dynamics and the Tent-Map RepellorTextbook

Motivation

One-dimensional maps are the smallest systems in which deterministic dynamics becomes unpredictable. Chapter 11 of Gerald Teschl's graduate text Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (author's version; AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012, doi:10.1090/gsm/140) uses them to make the word "chaos" precise. The chapter proves that a period-three orbit of a continuous interval map forces orbits of every period (Li and Yorke, 1975, the first case of Sarkovskii's theorem), adopts Devaney's topological definition of chaos, codes the tent map by sequences of two symbols, and ends by computing the Hausdorff dimension of the tent map's invariant Cantor set. The same pattern (a Cantor set, a conjugacy to a shift, a fractal dimension) returns in the Smale horseshoe of Chapter 13 and in hyperbolic dynamics generally, so the chapter is the standard entry point to symbolic dynamics.

Setting

For a real parameter μ\muμ the tent map is Tμ(x)=μ2(1−∣2x−1∣)T_\mu(x) = \frac{\mu}{2}(1 - |2x-1|)Tμ​(x)=2μ​(1−∣2x−1∣), a map of the real line. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2 the peak μ/2\mu/2μ/2 exceeds 111, points leave [0,1][0,1][0,1] and then escape to −∞-\infty−∞. The repellor of the tent map is the set of points that never leave,

Λ={ x∈R:Tμn(x)∈[0,1] for all n≥0 },\Lambda = \{\, x \in \mathbb{R} : T_\mu^n(x) \in [0,1] \text{ for all } n \ge 0 \,\},Λ={x∈R:Tμn​(x)∈[0,1] for all n≥0},

which the book builds as a nested intersection of 2n2^n2n intervals of length μ−n\mu^{-n}μ−n; for μ=2\mu = 2μ=2 it is all of [0,1][0,1][0,1]. With I0=[0,μ−1]I_0 = [0, \mu^{-1}]I0​=[0,μ−1] and I1=[1−μ−1,1]I_1 = [1-\mu^{-1}, 1]I1​=[1−μ−1,1], the itinerary map φ\varphiφ sends x∈Λx \in \Lambdax∈Λ to the sequence (xn)n≥0(x_n)_{n \ge 0}(xn​)n≥0​ with xn=jx_n = jxn​=j when Tμn(x)∈IjT_\mu^n(x) \in I_jTμn​(x)∈Ij​.

The sequence space ΣN={0,…,N−1}N0\Sigma_N = \{0, \dots, N-1\}^{\mathbb{N}_0}ΣN​={0,…,N−1}N0​, N≥2N \ge 2N≥2, carries the metric d(x,y)=∑n≥0∣xn−yn∣/Nnd(x,y) = \sum_{n \ge 0} |x_n - y_n| / N^nd(x,y)=∑n≥0​∣xn​−yn​∣/Nn and the shift σ(x0,x1,… )=(x1,x2,… )\sigma(x_0, x_1, \dots) = (x_1, x_2, \dots)σ(x0​,x1​,…)=(x1​,x2​,…).

A continuous map f:M→Mf : M \to Mf:M→M of a metric space is topologically transitive if for all nonempty open U,VU, VU,V some iterate fn(U)f^n(U)fn(U), n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, meets VVV. It is chaotic if in addition MMM is infinite and the periodic points of fff are dense. This is the definition used in the book, and it has no sensitivity clause. It has sensitive dependence on initial conditions if some δ>0\delta > 0δ>0 has the property that every xxx has points yyy arbitrarily close to it with d(fn(x),fn(y))>δd(f^n(x), f^n(y)) > \deltad(fn(x),fn(y))>δ for some n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. A compact set Λ\LambdaΛ with f(Λ)=Λf(\Lambda) = \Lambdaf(Λ)=Λ is repelling if some neighborhood UUU of Λ\LambdaΛ is eventually left by every orbit starting in U∖ΛU \setminus \LambdaU∖Λ. A repelling set is a repellor if (Λ,f∣Λ)(\Lambda, f|_\Lambda)(Λ,f∣Λ​) is transitive. It is a strange repellor if moreover (Λ,f∣Λ)(\Lambda, f|_\Lambda)(Λ,f∣Λ​) is chaotic and Λ\LambdaΛ is fractal, meaning its Hausdorff dimension dim⁡H\dim_HdimH​ is not an integer. A Cantor set is a compact, totally disconnected, perfect set.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 11.20

dim⁡H(Λ)=log⁡2log⁡μ(μ≥2),and for μ>2, Λ is a strange repellor of Tμ.\dim_H(\Lambda) = \frac{\log 2}{\log \mu} \quad (\mu \ge 2), \qquad \text{and for } \mu > 2,\ \Lambda \text{ is a strange repellor of } T_\mu .dimH​(Λ)=logμlog2​(μ≥2),and for μ>2, Λ is a strange repellor of Tμ​.

The book states the strange-repellor clause for μ≥2\mu \ge 2μ≥2. At μ=2\mu = 2μ=2, however, Λ=[0,1]\Lambda = [0,1]Λ=[0,1] has dimension 111, which is an integer, so the goal restricts that clause to μ>2\mu > 2μ>2.

Milestones

  • Lemma 11.1. A continuous f:[a,b]→[a,b]f : [a,b] \to [a,b]f:[a,b]→[a,b] with a point of prime period 333 has points of every prime period n≥1n \ge 1n≥1.
  • Lemma 11.3. A chaotic map has sensitive dependence on initial conditions.
  • Lemma 11.6. On ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​: d(x,y)≤N−nd(x,y) \le N^{-n}d(x,y)≤N−n if xj=yjx_j = y_jxj​=yj​ for all j≤nj \le nj≤n, and d(x,y)≥N−nd(x,y) \ge N^{-n}d(x,y)≥N−n if xj≠yjx_j \ne y_jxj​=yj​ for some j≤nj \le nj≤n.
  • Lemma 11.8. The periodic points of σ\sigmaσ on ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ are countable and dense.
  • Lemma 11.9. The shift on ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ has a dense forward orbit.
  • Lemma 11.4. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2, Λ\LambdaΛ is a Cantor set.
  • Theorem 11.5. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2, φ\varphiφ is a homeomorphism of Λ\LambdaΛ onto Σ2\Sigma_2Σ2​ with σ∘φ=φ∘Tμ\sigma \circ \varphi = \varphi \circ T_\muσ∘φ=φ∘Tμ​ on Λ\LambdaΛ.

Significance

The dimension formula is the simplest non-trivial instance of the principle that the Hausdorff dimension of an expanding repellor is determined by the number of branches and the expansion rate. For conformal repellors this principle becomes Bowen's formula. Theorem 11.23 of the same chapter extends the bound to general two-branch expanding interval maps, with log⁡2/log⁡β≤dim⁡HΛ≤log⁡2/log⁡α\log 2/\log\beta \le \dim_H \Lambda \le \log 2/\log\alphalog2/logβ≤dimH​Λ≤log2/logα. The conjugacy with the full shift is the device that reduces the dynamics on Λ\LambdaΛ to combinatorics of sequences. It is reused verbatim for the horseshoe.

On formalization: Mathlib has Hausdorff measure and dimension (MeasureTheory.Measure.hausdorffMeasure, dimH) together with Hölder and Lipschitz image bounds. It has no dimension computation for a self-similar Cantor set and no symbolic-dynamics layer. On Prove2Me, the Devaney series proves period three implies all periods and Sarkovskii's theorem for continuous maps R→R\mathbb{R} \to \mathbb{R}R→R, the density of periodic points and a dense orbit for the two-symbol shift, and a Cantor-set statement for the quadratic family. None of these states the results for self-maps of a compact interval, for NNN symbols, or for the tent map, and none computes a Hausdorff dimension. All results here are proved in the book, except that the proof of Theorem 11.20 is terse. None is formalized in the form stated here.

Difficulty

The upper bound dim⁡HΛ≤log⁡2/log⁡μ\dim_H \Lambda \le \log 2/\log\mudimH​Λ≤log2/logμ comes from the natural covers. The lower bound is the hard direction: it has to hold for every cover, including covers by sets of very different sizes that do not line up with the 2n2^n2n construction intervals. So the natural covers alone do not decide it. Counting the construction intervals that an arbitrary set of a given diameter can meet needs the gaps between them to be controlled uniformly. The heuristic self-similarity identity hα(Λ)=2μ−αhα(Λ)h^\alpha(\Lambda) = 2\mu^{-\alpha} h^\alpha(\Lambda)hα(Λ)=2μ−αhα(Λ) fixes α\alphaα only once 0<hα(Λ)<∞0 < h^\alpha(\Lambda) < \infty0<hα(Λ)<∞ is known, and that is exactly what has to be proved. For the strange-repellor clause, every part of the definition (repelling, transitive, infinite, dense periodic points, fractal) has to be checked for (Λ,Tμ∣Λ)(\Lambda, T_\mu|_\Lambda)(Λ,Tμ​∣Λ​) with the subspace topology. Transferring transitivity and density of periodic points from Σ2\Sigma_2Σ2​ requires the homeomorphism of Theorem 11.5 in both directions, not just a continuous surjection. In Lemma 11.1 the difficulty is showing that the periodic point found has prime period nnn, not a divisor of nnn.

Formalization scope

Everything is stated in namespace TeschlODE.IntervalMaps against Mathlib.

  • The tent map is a total function R→R\mathbb{R} \to \mathbb{R}R→R, and Λ\LambdaΛ is defined as the set of points whose orbit stays in [0,1][0,1][0,1], uniformly in μ\muμ. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2 this is the book's ⋂nΛn\bigcap_n \Lambda_n⋂n​Λn​ (11.18).
  • ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ is ℕ → Fin N, and the metric (11.28) is a function symDist N (a tsum, summable for N≥2N \ge 2N≥2). Density and continuity on ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ are stated in explicit ε\varepsilonε–δ\deltaδ form with this function. Each theorem assumes N≥2N \ge 2N≥2, the book's N∈N∖{1}N \in \mathbb{N}\setminus\{1\}N∈N∖{1}.
  • The itinerary map is ℝ → (ℕ → Fin 2). Its values off Λ\LambdaΛ are meaningless and never used. "Homeomorphism" in Theorem 11.5 means: φ\varphiφ is a bijection of Λ\LambdaΛ onto Σ2\Sigma_2Σ2​, it is continuous on Λ\LambdaΛ, and its inverse is continuous, all in metric form.
  • Chaos, transitivity, repelling sets, repellors and strange repellors are predicates on a map of a metric space. The restricted system (Λ,f∣Λ)(\Lambda, f|_\Lambda)(Λ,f∣Λ​) uses the subspace topology. Transitivity quantifies over nonempty open sets and iterates n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. Periodic points are Function.periodicPts, and the prime period in Lemma 11.1 is Function.minimalPeriod on the subtype [a,b][a,b][a,b].
  • dim⁡H\dim_HdimH​ is Mathlib's dimH, valued in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. "Not an integer" means finite and different from every natural number. The goal's right-hand side is ENNReal.ofReal (log 2 / log μ).

There are no "sufficiently small" or O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) readings in this chapter. The only quantifier choices are the explicit ε\varepsilonε–δ\deltaδ forms above and the nonempty open sets in transitivity.

The goal is not a dimension-only statement. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2, a statement that proved only (11.49), or that restricted to a single value such as μ=3\mu = 3μ=3, would be a different and weaker theorem. The full strange-repellor conclusion, with every clause of the definition, is required. Solvers can reuse the symbolic-dynamics lemmas (11.6, 11.8, 11.9) and the conjugacy (11.5). General Mathlib contributions on ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ as a metric space are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012. Author's version: https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf ; https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/140
  • R. L. Devaney, An Introduction to Chaotic Dynamical Systems, 2nd ed., Addison-Wesley, 1989 (book; no DOI).
  • T.-Y. Li and J. A. Yorke, "Period three implies chaos", American Mathematical Monthly 82 (1975), 985–992. https://doi.org/10.2307/2318254
  • K. Falconer, Fractal Geometry: Mathematical Foundations and Applications, Wiley, 1990 (book; no DOI for the first edition).
  • C. Robinson, Dynamical Systems: Stability, Symbolic Dynamics, and Chaos, 2nd ed., CRC Press, 1999 (book).
21 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems VI: The Poincaré–Bendixson TheoremTextbook

Motivation

Long-time behaviour is the central question about an autonomous differential equation x˙=f(x)\dot x = f(x)x˙=f(x): where does a trajectory go as t→±∞t \to \pm\inftyt→±∞? In the plane this question has an almost complete answer. The theory begun by Poincaré (Mémoire sur les courbes définies par une équation différentielle, 1881–1886) and completed by Bendixson (Sur les courbes définies par des équations différentielles, Acta Math. 24, 1901, doi:10.1007/BF02403068) shows that a bounded planar trajectory can only accumulate on equilibria, on a periodic orbit, or on a chain of equilibria joined by connecting orbits. Chaotic behaviour, which already occurs for three-dimensional flows such as the Lorenz system, is excluded. It is the standard tool for proving that a planar system has a limit cycle, and it underlies Hilbert's 16th problem.

This mission formalizes Section 7.3 of G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (author's preliminary version of AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012), pp. 220–224, which proves the classical theorem and the generalized version with finitely many fixed points.

Setting

Let M⊆R2M \subseteq \mathbb{R}^2M⊆R2 be open and f∈C1(M,R2)f \in C^1(M, \mathbb{R}^2)f∈C1(M,R2). An integral curve at xxx is a function φ\varphiφ on an open interval J∋0J \ni 0J∋0 with φ(0)=x\varphi(0) = xφ(0)=x, φ(J)⊆M\varphi(J) \subseteq Mφ(J)⊆M and φ˙(s)=f(φ(s))\dot\varphi(s) = f(\varphi(s))φ˙​(s)=f(φ(s)) on JJJ. The union of all such JJJ is the maximal interval Ix=(T−(x),T+(x))I_x = (T_-(x), T_+(x))Ix​=(T−​(x),T+​(x)). The flow Φ(t,x)\Phi(t, x)Φ(t,x), t∈Ixt \in I_xt∈Ix​, is the value at time ttt of the maximal integral curve at xxx. With σ∈{+,−}\sigma \in \{+,-\}σ∈{+,−}:

  • the orbit is γ(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix}\gamma(x) = \{\Phi(t,x) : t \in I_x\}γ(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix​}, and the half-orbit γσ(x)\gamma_\sigma(x)γσ​(x) keeps only t∈Ixt \in I_xt∈Ix​ with σt>0\sigma t > 0σt>0;
  • a fixed point is a point with f(x)=0f(x) = 0f(x)=0; a periodic point is a point with Φ(T,x)=x\Phi(T, x) = xΦ(T,x)=x for some T>0T > 0T>0 in IxI_xIx​ (fixed points included). A regular periodic orbit is the orbit of a periodic point that is not fixed, and a non-closed orbit is the orbit of a point that is not periodic;
  • the ωσ\omega_\sigmaωσ​-limit set ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) is the set of y∈My \in My∈M with Φ(tk,x)→y\Phi(t_k, x) \to yΦ(tk​,x)→y for some times tk∈Ixt_k \in I_xtk​∈Ix​, tk→σ∞t_k \to \sigma\inftytk​→σ∞;
  • a set U⊆MU \subseteq MU⊆M is σ\sigmaσ invariant if γσ(x)⊆U\gamma_\sigma(x) \subseteq Uγσ​(x)⊆U for every x∈Ux \in Ux∈U;
  • a transversal arc Σ=s(J)\Sigma = s(J)Σ=s(J) is the image of a C1C^1C1 embedding sss of an open interval JJJ into MMM with s˙≠0\dot s \ne 0s˙=0 and s˙1f2(s)−s˙2f1(s)≠0\dot s_1 f_2(s) - \dot s_2 f_1(s) \neq 0s˙1​f2​(s)−s˙2​f1​(s)=0 on JJJ. The parameter orders the points of Σ\SigmaΣ.

In Lean, points are Fin 2 → ℝ (general Fin n → ℝ for the Chapter 6 notions), and σ\sigmaσ is a Bool with true for +++. The definitions are lifetime, flow, orbit, halfOrbit, omegaLimitSet, IsPeriodicPoint and IsTransversalArc, all in the namespace TeschlODE.Planar.

Formalization targets

Goal: the generalized Poincaré–Bendixson theorem (Theorem 7.16)

Fix x∈Mx \in Mx∈M and σ\sigmaσ, and suppose ωσ(x)≠∅\omega_\sigma(x) \neq \emptysetωσ​(x)=∅ is compact, connected and contains only finitely many fixed points. Then one of three cases holds:

(i) ωσ(x)={x0}, f(x0)=0;(ii) ωσ(x)=γ(y), y periodic, f(y)≠0;\text{(i) } \omega_\sigma(x) = \{x_0\},\ f(x_0) = 0; \qquad \text{(ii) } \omega_\sigma(x) = \gamma(y),\ y \text{ periodic},\ f(y) \neq 0;(i) ωσ​(x)={x0​}, f(x0​)=0;(ii) ωσ​(x)=γ(y), y periodic, f(y)=0; (iii) every y∈ωσ(x) with f(y)≠0 lies on a non-closed orbit γ(y)⊆ωσ(x) with ω+(y)={a}, ω−(y)={b},\text{(iii) every } y \in \omega_\sigma(x) \text{ with } f(y) \ne 0 \text{ lies on a non-closed orbit } \gamma(y) \subseteq \omega_\sigma(x) \text{ with } \omega_+(y) = \{a\},\ \omega_-(y) = \{b\},(iii) every y∈ωσ​(x) with f(y)=0 lies on a non-closed orbit γ(y)⊆ωσ​(x) with ω+​(y)={a}, ω−​(y)={b},

where a,ba, ba,b are fixed points in ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 7.9. The successive intersections of γσ(x0)\gamma_\sigma(x_0)γσ​(x0​) with a transversal arc through a regular point x0x_0x0​ are monotone along the arc.
  2. Corollary 7.10. ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) meets a transversal arc in at most one point.
  3. Corollary 7.11. If ωσ(x)∩γσ(x)≠∅\omega_\sigma(x) \cap \gamma_\sigma(x) \neq \emptysetωσ​(x)∩γσ​(x)=∅, then xxx is periodic and ω+(x)=ω−(x)=γ(x)\omega_+(x) = \omega_-(x) = \gamma(x)ω+​(x)=ω−​(x)=γ(x).
  4. Corollary 7.12. A minimal compact σ\sigmaσ invariant set is a periodic orbit.
  5. Lemma 7.13 (Poincaré–Bendixson). A nonempty compact ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) without fixed points is a regular periodic orbit.
  6. Lemma 7.14. A connected ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) that contains a regular periodic orbit γ(y)\gamma(y)γ(y) equals γ(y)\gamma(y)γ(y).
  7. Lemma 7.15. If ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) is compact, at most one orbit in ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) runs from a fixed point x−x_-x−​ to a distinct fixed point x+x_+x+​.

Significance

The theorem turns the existence of periodic solutions into a topological statement. It is enough to find a compact positively invariant region with no equilibria, often an annulus bounded by two curves on which the vector field points inward. This is how periodic orbits are established for the van der Pol and Liénard equations (Theorem 7.8 of the same chapter) and for many models in biology and chemistry. The generalized version also describes limit sets that contain equilibria, such as homoclinic and heteroclinic cycles. Corollary 7.12 records the dimensional boundary: in the plane every minimal set is a periodic orbit, while from dimension three on minimal sets can be invariant tori with dense orbits.

The results have been proved for over a century. None of them is formalized in Mathlib or on the platform. Mathlib has omegaLimit for global flows on topological spaces and existence and uniqueness of integral curves, but no local flow of a vector field on an open set, no transversal sections and no Jordan curve theorem. This mission produces a machine-checked planar limit-set theory. The local flow and limit-set layer it needs is reusable for every later chapter on dynamical systems.

Difficulty

The statements are topological, and the proofs rest on the Jordan curve theorem for piecewise C1C^1C1 curves: a closed curve made of an orbit segment and a piece of transversal arc separates the plane, and trajectories cannot cross it in the forbidden direction. That theorem is not in Mathlib, and the platform's Jordan-curve and Schoenflies statements are open. Everything that looks one-dimensional in a sketch, "the orbit enters the inside and is trapped", depends on it. The ingredients a sketch treats as obvious also need care: the flow-box straightening (Lemma 6.2), the local return map to a transversal arc (Lemma 6.9), and the invariance, closedness and connectedness of limit sets (Lemmas 6.5–6.6). Generic arguments about compact invariant sets do not suffice: the conclusions are false in R3\mathbb{R}^3R3, so any proof must use planarity.

Formalization scope

  • Points are Fin 2 → ℝ. Its sup norm induces the Euclidean topology, and no statement depends on the norm. fff is a total function with ContDiffOn ℝ 1 f M on the open set MMM.
  • The flow is defined, not assumed. lifetime f M x is the union of domains of integral curves at xxx, and flow f M t x is the value at ttt of such a curve, selected by choice (unique for C1C^1C1 fields). Outside IxI_xIx​ the flow has the junk value xxx, and no statement evaluates it there. Limit points must lie in MMM, as in the book.
  • σ∈{±}\sigma \in \{\pm\}σ∈{±} is a Bool; true means +++ (atTop), false means −-− (atBot).
  • "Periodic" includes fixed points (period zero), as in the book. "Regular periodic" is periodic with f(y)≠0f(y) \neq 0f(y)=0, and "non-closed" is not periodic.
  • A transversal arc is a C1C^1C1 topological embedding of an open interval into MMM. The book says "smooth", so these statements cover a wider class of arcs and are at least as strong as the book's. Lemma 7.9's "monotone sequence of intersections" is stated as: any parametrization uuu of the intersection points (s(u(t))=Φ(t,x0)s(u(t)) = \Phi(t, x_0)s(u(t))=Φ(t,x0​)) is monotone or antitone on the set of intersection times.
  • "Connected" is IsPreconnected; nonemptiness is a separate hypothesis. "Finitely many fixed points" is Set.Finite {y ∈ ω_σ(x) | f y = 0}. The book's "ω±(y)∈{xj}\omega_\pm(y) \in \{x_j\}ω±​(y)∈{xj​}" is ω±(y)={a}\omega_\pm(y) = \{a\}ω±​(y)={a} for a fixed point a∈ωσ(x)a \in \omega_\sigma(x)a∈ωσ​(x). No statement uses O(·), "sufficiently small" or an unspecified constant.
  • The four hypotheses on ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) (nonempty, compact, connected, finitely many fixed points) are the book's and are all kept. A formalization that drops one of them, or reads "regular periodic orbit" to include a fixed point, is not the theorem.
  • Needed infrastructure: local existence, uniqueness and continuity of the flow (Chapter 2, 6.1), the flow box, the Jordan curve theorem for piecewise C1C^1C1 curves, and the basic limit-set lemmas of Chapter 6. Contributions of any of these as separate lemmas are welcome, and the Jordan curve theorem in particular is reusable far beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, AMS, 2012 (author's preliminary version, §7.3). doi:10.1090/gsm/140, author's copy
  • I. Bendixson, Sur les courbes définies par des équations différentielles, Acta Mathematica 24 (1901), 1–88. doi:10.1007/BF02403068
  • M. W. Hirsch, S. Smale, R. L. Devaney, Differential Equations, Dynamical Systems, and an Introduction to Chaos, 3rd ed., Academic Press, 2013, Ch. 10. doi:10.1016/C2009-0-61160-0
  • L. Perko, Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, 3rd ed., Springer, 2001, §3.7. doi:10.1007/978-1-4613-0003-8
16 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
AnalysisControl Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems V: Limit Sets and the Krasovskii–LaSalle PrincipleTextbook

Motivation

Most differential equations that model physical, biological or engineered systems cannot be solved in closed form, yet the question asked about them is usually qualitative: does the system settle down to an equilibrium, and does it stay near the equilibrium when perturbed? Liapunov's direct method answers that question without solving the equation, by exhibiting a function that does not increase along solutions. It is the standard tool of nonlinear stability analysis and of control design, where a controller is typically certified by a Liapunov function for the closed-loop system (Khalil, Nonlinear Systems).

A Liapunov function whose values strictly decrease along every non-constant solution gives asymptotic stability directly. In practice the natural candidate, often the total energy of a damped mechanical system, only satisfies a non-strict inequality. The Krasovskii–LaSalle invariance principle closes that gap: if the function is not constant along any complete orbit other than the equilibrium, the equilibrium is still asymptotically stable. It was established by Barbashin and Krasovskii (1952) and by LaSalle (1960, IRE Trans. Circuit Theory 7).

This mission formalizes Chapter 6 of Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012; author's preliminary version), from the local flow of an autonomous equation, through limit sets, to the principle itself.

Setting

Fix n∈Nn \in \mathbb{N}n∈N, an open set M⊆RnM \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nM⊆Rn (the phase space) and a vector field f:M→Rnf : M \to \mathbb{R}^nf:M→Rn of class C1C^1C1. The autonomous system is x˙=f(x)\dot x = f(x)x˙=f(x). An integral curve is a differentiable map φ\varphiφ from an open interval JJJ into MMM with φ˙(t)=f(φ(t))\dot\varphi(t) = f(\varphi(t))φ˙​(t)=f(φ(t)) for all t∈Jt \in Jt∈J.

For each x∈Mx \in Mx∈M there is a maximal interval Ix=(T−(x),T+(x))∋0I_x = (T_-(x), T_+(x)) \ni 0Ix​=(T−​(x),T+​(x))∋0 and a unique maximal integral curve t↦Φ(t,x)t \mapsto \Phi(t, x)t↦Φ(t,x) on IxI_xIx​ with Φ(0,x)=x\Phi(0, x) = xΦ(0,x)=x: every integral curve through xxx at time 000 is a restriction of it. The map Φ\PhiΦ on W={(t,x):x∈M, t∈Ix}W = \{(t, x) : x \in M,\ t \in I_x\}W={(t,x):x∈M, t∈Ix​} is the flow. It is a local flow: IxI_xIx​ may be bounded, because solutions can leave MMM or blow up in finite time.

The orbit of xxx is γ(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix}\gamma(x) = \{\Phi(t, x) : t \in I_x\}γ(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix​} and the forward orbit is γ+(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix, t>0}\gamma_+(x) = \{\Phi(t, x) : t \in I_x,\ t > 0\}γ+​(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix​, t>0} (γ−(x)\gamma_-(x)γ−​(x) with t<0t < 0t<0). The ω+\omega_+ω+​-limit set ω+(x)\omega_+(x)ω+​(x) is the set of y∈My \in My∈M with Φ(tk,x)→y\Phi(t_k, x) \to yΦ(tk​,x)→y for some times tk→+∞t_k \to +\inftytk​→+∞ in IxI_xIx​; ω−(x)\omega_-(x)ω−​(x) uses tk→−∞t_k \to -\inftytk​→−∞.

A point x0∈Mx_0 \in Mx0​∈M with f(x0)=0f(x_0) = 0f(x0​)=0 is a fixed point. It is stable if every neighborhood U′U'U′ of x0x_0x0​ contains a neighborhood VVV of x0x_0x0​ such that solutions starting in VVV exist and stay in U′U'U′ for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. It is asymptotically stable if moreover Φ(t,x)→x0\Phi(t, x) \to x_0Φ(t,x)→x0​ as t→∞t \to \inftyt→∞ for all xxx in some neighborhood of x0x_0x0​.

A Liapunov function at x0x_0x0​ is a continuous L:U→RL : U \to \mathbb{R}L:U→R on an open neighborhood U⊆MU \subseteq MU⊆M of x0x_0x0​ with L(x0)=0L(x_0) = 0L(x0​)=0, L>0L > 0L>0 on U∖{x0}U \setminus \{x_0\}U∖{x0​}, and L(φ(t0))≥L(φ(t1))L(\varphi(t_0)) \ge L(\varphi(t_1))L(φ(t0​))≥L(φ(t1​)) for every integral curve φ\varphiφ and all t0<t1t_0 < t_1t0​<t1​ with φ(t0),φ(t1)∈U∖{x0}\varphi(t_0), \varphi(t_1) \in U \setminus \{x_0\}φ(t0​),φ(t1​)∈U∖{x0​}. It is strict if the inequality is always strict. SδS_\deltaSδ​ denotes the connected component of {x∈U:L(x)≤δ}\{x \in U : L(x) \le \delta\}{x∈U:L(x)≤δ} containing x0x_0x0​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.14 (Krasovskii–LaSalle principle)

Let x0x_0x0​ be a fixed point and LLL a Liapunov function at x0x_0x0​ on UUU. Write (∗)(\ast)(∗) for: LLL is not constant on any orbit lying entirely in U∖{x0}U \setminus \{x_0\}U∖{x0​}, i.e. every y∈My \in My∈M with γ(y)⊆U∖{x0}\gamma(y) \subseteq U \setminus \{x_0\}γ(y)⊆U∖{x0​} has points a,b∈γ(y)a, b \in \gamma(y)a,b∈γ(y) with L(a)≠L(b)L(a) \ne L(b)L(a)=L(b). Then

(∗) ⟹ x0 is asymptotically stable;L strict ⟹ (∗);(\ast) \ \Longrightarrow\ x_0 \text{ is asymptotically stable}; \qquad L \text{ strict} \ \Longrightarrow\ (\ast);(∗) ⟹ x0​ is asymptotically stable;L strict ⟹ (∗);

and, under (∗)(\ast)(∗), every x∈Mx \in Mx∈M whose forward orbit lies in a compact subset of UUU satisfies Φ(t,x)→x0\Phi(t, x) \to x_0Φ(t,x)→x0​ as t→∞t \to \inftyt→∞.

Milestones

In attack order: Theorem 6.1 (the maximal flow exists, WWW is open, Φ\PhiΦ is CkC^kCk on WWW, and Φ(t+s,x)=Φ(t,Φ(s,x))\Phi(t+s, x) = \Phi(t, \Phi(s, x))Φ(t+s,x)=Φ(t,Φ(s,x))); Lemma 6.3 (a forward orbit in a compact subset of MMM forces T+(x)=∞T_+(x) = \inftyT+​(x)=∞); Lemma 6.6 (ω±(x)\omega_\pm(x)ω±​(x) is then nonempty, compact and connected); Lemma 6.7 (d(Φ(t,x),ω±(x))→0d(\Phi(t, x), \omega_\pm(x)) \to 0d(Φ(t,x),ω±​(x))→0); Theorem 6.15 (a function non-increasing along γ+(x)⊆U\gamma_+(x) \subseteq Uγ+​(x)⊆U is constant on ω+(x)∩U\omega_+(x) \cap Uω+​(x)∩U); Lemma 6.11 (a closed SδS_\deltaSδ​ is positively invariant); Lemma 6.12 (Sε⊆Bδ(x0)S_\varepsilon \subseteq B_\delta(x_0)Sε​⊆Bδ​(x0​) and Bε(x0)⊆SδB_\varepsilon(x_0) \subseteq S_\deltaBε​(x0​)⊆Sδ​); Theorem 6.13 (Liapunov: a Liapunov function makes x0x_0x0​ stable).

Significance

The result itself. The invariance principle is the form of Liapunov's method used in applications. It gives asymptotic stability of damped mechanical systems from their energy, of gradient systems from their potential, and of adaptive and passivity-based controllers, where the natural Liapunov function is only non-increasing. Its limit-set formulation (Theorem 6.15) is also the entry point to the Poincaré–Bendixson theory of the next chapter, which uses the same ω\omegaω-limit sets.

Formalizing it. Mathlib has local existence and uniqueness for ODEs and a theory of ω\omegaω-limit sets for global flows (omegaLimit, Flow). It has no maximal solution of an ODE, no local flow with its maximal intervals, and no Liapunov stability theory. The results are classical and proved in the book; none has a machine-checked proof on this platform. This mission builds the local-flow and limit-set layer and the Liapunov layer on top of it.

Difficulty

The central difficulty is that the flow is local. The book's arguments pass freely between "the solution stays in a compact set" and "the solution exists for all positive time" (Lemma 6.3). In a formal setting every statement about Φ(t,x)\Phi(t, x)Φ(t,x) must first establish t∈Ixt \in I_xt∈Ix​, and the maximal interval must be constructed from local solutions. Theorem 6.1 on its own requires gluing local solutions into a maximal one and proving that the domain WWW is open with CkC^kCk dependence on initial conditions.

A common first idea is to assume the vector field is complete, so that Mathlib's global Flow and omegaLimit apply directly. That assumption is not available: the goal concerns orbits that stay in the neighborhood UUU, and completeness of such orbits is a consequence of the argument, not a hypothesis. Similarly, LLL is only continuous, so a derivative-based criterion ∇L⋅f≤0\nabla L \cdot f \le 0∇L⋅f≤0 cannot replace condition (6.36).

Formalization scope

The state space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), so ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm, and Br(x0)B_r(x_0)Br​(x0​) is the open ball Metric.ball. The standing assumption f∈Ck(M,Rn)f \in C^k(M, \mathbb{R}^n)f∈Ck(M,Rn), k≥1k \ge 1k≥1, MMM open, is a binder of every theorem (as ContDiffOn ℝ 1 f M, the weakest case, and for general k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 in Theorem 6.1). The flow enters as a pair (I, Φ) satisfying IsMaximalFlow f M I Φ, which characterizes the maximal integral curves uniquely. Theorem 6.1 proves that such a pair exists, so no completeness or extra regularity is assumed. The two time directions σ∈{±}\sigma \in \{\pm\}σ∈{±} of Lemmas 6.3–6.7 are one statement with a real parameter σ = 1 ∨ σ = -1. The ω\omegaω-limit set contains only points of MMM, as in the book.

Stability conclusions include existence of the solution for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. The Liapunov condition quantifies over every integral curve and constrains only the two endpoint values, exactly as (6.36). LLL is a total function whose values off UUU are never read.

Correction to the printed statement. The book's final sentence of Theorem 6.14, "every orbit lying entirely in U(x0)U(x_0)U(x0​) converges to x0x_0x0​", is false as printed. With U=M=R2U = M = \mathbb{R}^2U=M=R2 and a strict Liapunov function, some orbits escape to infinity (Khalil, §4.1). The goal therefore asks for convergence of every forward orbit contained in a compact subset of UUU, which is what the book's argument uses. The other two parts are as printed.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: stability and asymptotic stability are stated for the maximal flow, with existence for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0 required, and not for an arbitrary map Φ or a flow assumed global. Asymptotic stability keeps both conjuncts, stability and attraction.

Needed infrastructure: maximal solutions of C1C^1C1 autonomous ODEs and their continuation (reusable across Chapters 6–13), openness of WWW and smooth dependence on initial data, compactness arguments for limit sets, and connected components of sublevel sets. Contributions of the local-flow layer as standalone lemmas are especially welcome, since later missions of this series rely on the same objects.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, AMS, 2012; author's preliminary version, Chapter 6, pp. 187–208. https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf (published book: https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/140)
  • J. P. LaSalle, Some extensions of Liapunov's second method, IRE Transactions on Circuit Theory 7 (1960), 520–527. https://doi.org/10.1109/TCT.1960.1086720
  • E. A. Barbashin and N. N. Krasovskii, On global stability of motion, Doklady Akademii Nauk SSSR 86 (1952), 453–456.
  • H. K. Khalil, Nonlinear Systems, 3rd ed., Prentice Hall, 2002, §4.1–4.2. https://www.pearson.com/en-us/subject-catalog/p/nonlinear-systems/P200000003359
19 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems I: Existence, Uniqueness and Peano's TheoremTextbook

Why initial value problems come first

Almost every quantitative statement about an ordinary differential equation, from the stability of an equilibrium to the existence of a periodic orbit, presupposes that the equation has a solution through each initial point and, usually, that this solution is unique and depends continuously on the data. Chapter 2 of Gerald Teschl's graduate textbook Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (author's preliminary version of AMS GSM 140, 2012) establishes these facts for first-order systems in Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn. It is the foundation for the rest of the series: the flows, limit sets, Poincaré maps and invariant manifolds of later chapters are all built on the existence, uniqueness and extension results proved here.

A short history. Local existence was first proved in the nineteenth century by polygonal approximation (Cauchy) under differentiability-type hypotheses. Lipschitz isolated the condition that bears his name. Picard and Lindelöf established existence and uniqueness by successive approximation, and Banach (1922) abstracted the argument into the contraction principle. Peano (1890) showed that continuity of the right-hand side alone suffices for existence, without uniqueness. Gronwall's inequality and its integral generalisations give the continuous dependence estimates. Teschl's chapter presents all of these in a uniform notation.

Setting

An initial value problem (IVP) is

x˙=f(t,x),x(t0)=x0,(2.10)\dot x = f(t, x), \qquad x(t_0) = x_0, \qquad (2.10)x˙=f(t,x),x(t0​)=x0​,(2.10)

where fff is a continuous map from an open set U⊆R×RnU \subseteq \mathbb{R} \times \mathbb{R}^nU⊆R×Rn to Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn and (t0,x0)∈U(t_0, x_0) \in U(t0​,x0​)∈U. Here ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn. A solution on an interval III is a function x:I→Rnx : I \to \mathbb{R}^nx:I→Rn whose graph {(t,x(t)):t∈I}\{(t, x(t)) : t \in I\}{(t,x(t)):t∈I} lies in UUU and which is differentiable on III (one-sidedly at an endpoint that belongs to III) with x˙(t)=f(t,x(t))\dot x(t) = f(t, x(t))x˙(t)=f(t,x(t)). Such a solution is automatically continuously differentiable.

The function fff is locally Lipschitz in the second argument, uniformly with respect to the first, if for every compact V0⊆UV_0 \subseteq UV0​⊆U there is a constant LLL with ∣f(t,x)−f(t,y)∣≤L∣x−y∣|f(t,x) - f(t,y)| \le L|x - y|∣f(t,x)−f(t,y)∣≤L∣x−y∣ whenever (t,x),(t,y)∈V0(t,x), (t,y) \in V_0(t,x),(t,y)∈V0​ (the book's (2.18)).

For T,δ>0T, \delta > 0T,δ>0 let V=[t0,t0+T]×Bˉδ(x0)V = [t_0, t_0 + T] \times \bar B_\delta(x_0)V=[t0​,t0​+T]×Bˉδ​(x0​), where Bˉδ(x0)={x:∣x−x0∣≤δ}\bar B_\delta(x_0) = \{x : |x - x_0| \le \delta\}Bˉδ​(x0​)={x:∣x−x0​∣≤δ}, let M=max⁡V∣f∣M = \max_V |f|M=maxV​∣f∣, and define the existence time

T0=min⁡{T,δM},with δM=∞ when M=0.T_0 = \min\Bigl\{T, \frac{\delta}{M}\Bigr\}, \qquad \text{with } \frac{\delta}{M} = \infty \text{ when } M = 0 .T0​=min{T,Mδ​},with Mδ​=∞ when M=0.

The chapter also works in a real Banach space XXX, a complete normed real vector space, where a contraction of a closed set C⊆XC \subseteq XC⊆X is a map K:C→CK : C \to CK:C→C with ∥K(x)−K(y)∥≤θ∥x−y∥\|K(x) - K(y)\| \le \theta\|x - y\|∥K(x)−K(y)∥≤θ∥x−y∥ for some θ∈[0,1)\theta \in [0, 1)θ∈[0,1).

Formalization targets

Goal: Peano's existence theorem (Theorem 2.19)

If fff is continuous on V=[t0,t0+T]×Bˉδ(x0)V = [t_0, t_0 + T] \times \bar B_\delta(x_0)V=[t0​,t0​+T]×Bˉδ​(x0​) and M=max⁡V∣f∣M = \max_V |f|M=maxV​∣f∣, then there is a function xxx with x(t0)=x0x(t_0) = x_0x(t0​)=x0​ solving

x˙(t)=f(t,x(t)),∣x(t)−x0∣≤δ,t∈[t0,t0+T0],\dot x(t) = f(t, x(t)), \qquad |x(t) - x_0| \le \delta, \qquad t \in [t_0, t_0 + T_0],x˙(t)=f(t,x(t)),∣x(t)−x0​∣≤δ,t∈[t0​,t0​+T0​],

and the analogous statement holds on [t0−T0,t0][t_0 - T_0, t_0][t0​−T0​,t0​] with V=[t0−T,t0]×Bˉδ(x0)V = [t_0 - T, t_0] \times \bar B_\delta(x_0)V=[t0​−T,t0​]×Bˉδ​(x0​). No Lipschitz condition is assumed and the solution need not be unique.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 2.1 (contraction principle). A contraction of a nonempty closed subset of a Banach space has a unique fixed point xˉ\bar xxˉ, and ∥Km(x)−xˉ∥≤θm1−θ∥K(x)−x∥\|K^m(x) - \bar x\| \le \frac{\theta^m}{1-\theta}\|K(x) - x\|∥Km(x)−xˉ∥≤1−θθm​∥K(x)−x∥ for every x∈Cx \in Cx∈C.
  2. Theorem 2.2 (Picard–Lindelöf). Under the local Lipschitz condition, (2.10) has a solution on an open interval around t0t_0t0​; two solutions on any interval containing t0t_0t0​ coincide; and a solution exists on [t0,t0+T0][t_0, t_0 + T_0][t0​,t0​+T0​] with graph in VVV (and on [t0−T0,t0][t_0 - T_0, t_0][t0​−T0​,t0​]).
  3. Theorem 2.4 (Weissinger). If ∥Km(x)−Km(y)∥≤θm∥x−y∥\|K^m(x) - K^m(y)\| \le \theta_m\|x - y\|∥Km(x)−Km(y)∥≤θm​∥x−y∥ with ∑θm<∞\sum \theta_m < \infty∑θm​<∞, then KKK has a unique fixed point and ∥Km(x)−xˉ∥≤(∑j≥mθj)∥K(x)−x∥\|K^m(x) - \bar x\| \le \bigl(\sum_{j \ge m}\theta_j\bigr)\|K(x) - x\|∥Km(x)−xˉ∥≤(∑j≥m​θj​)∥K(x)−x∥.
  4. Lemma 2.7 (generalised Gronwall). ψ≤α+∫0tβψ\psi \le \alpha + \int_0^t \beta\psiψ≤α+∫0t​βψ with β≥0\beta \ge 0β≥0 implies ψ(t)≤α(t)+∫0tα(s)β(s)e∫stβ ds\psi(t) \le \alpha(t) + \int_0^t \alpha(s)\beta(s)e^{\int_s^t \beta}\,dsψ(t)≤α(t)+∫0t​α(s)β(s)e∫st​βds, and ψ(t)≤α(t)e∫0tβ\psi(t) \le \alpha(t)e^{\int_0^t\beta}ψ(t)≤α(t)e∫0t​β for nondecreasing α\alphaα.
  5. Theorem 2.8 (continuous dependence). ∣x(t)−y(t)∣≤∣x0−y0∣eL∣t−t0∣+ML(eL∣t−t0∣−1)|x(t) - y(t)| \le |x_0 - y_0|e^{L|t-t_0|} + \frac{M}{L}(e^{L|t-t_0|} - 1)∣x(t)−y(t)∣≤∣x0​−y0​∣eL∣t−t0​∣+LM​(eL∣t−t0​∣−1) for solutions of x˙=f(t,x)\dot x = f(t,x)x˙=f(t,x) and y˙=g(t,y)\dot y = g(t,y)y˙​=g(t,y).
  6. Theorem 2.17 (global existence). If ∣f(t,x)∣≤M(T)+L(T)∣x∣|f(t,x)| \le M(T) + L(T)|x|∣f(t,x)∣≤M(T)+L(T)∣x∣ on [−T,T]×Rn[-T, T] \times \mathbb{R}^n[−T,T]×Rn for every T>0T > 0T>0, every solution extends to all of R\mathbb{R}R.
  7. Theorem 2.18 (Arzelà–Ascoli). A bounded, equicontinuous sequence in C([a,b],Rn)C([a,b], \mathbb{R}^n)C([a,b],Rn) has a uniformly convergent subsequence.

Significance

Peano's theorem is the existence statement with the weakest regularity hypothesis on fff in the classical theory. It is what lets one speak of solutions of equations with non-Lipschitz right-hand sides, such as x˙=∣x∣\dot x = \sqrt{|x|}x˙=∣x∣​, and it is the starting point for the theory of non-unique solutions and differential inclusions. The explicit existence time T0=min⁡{T,δ/M}T_0 = \min\{T, \delta/M\}T0​=min{T,δ/M} is the quantitative form used whenever one needs a uniform lower bound on the lifetime of solutions starting in a compact set. Picard–Lindelöf, Gronwall and continuous dependence together make the IVP well posed. The global existence theorem under linear growth is used throughout the later chapters to define global flows.

Mathlib already contains a Picard–Lindelöf theorem (IsPicardLindelof), Gronwall's inequality in differential form, the Banach fixed point theorem for complete (extended) metric spaces, and an Arzelà–Ascoli theorem for bounded continuous functions. It does not contain Peano's theorem, the integral form of the generalised Gronwall inequality with variable α\alphaα, Weissinger's theorem, or global existence under linear growth. The statements here are phrased in the book's setting: one-sided intervals, the M=0M = 0M=0 convention for T0T_0T0​, local Lipschitz conditions on an open set, Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn-valued functions. Connecting them to the existing Mathlib results is part of the work.

Difficulty

For Peano's theorem the obvious approach, Picard iteration, does not apply. Without a Lipschitz condition the integral operator x↦x0+∫t0tf(s,x(s)) dsx \mapsto x_0 + \int_{t_0}^t f(s, x(s))\,dsx↦x0​+∫t0​t​f(s,x(s))ds need not be a contraction on any ball, its fixed points need not be unique, and a sequence of approximate solutions need not converge. Any argument has to produce a solution without a uniqueness mechanism and still reach the full interval [t0,t0+T0][t_0, t_0 + T_0][t0​,t0​+T0​] that the theorem specifies, not merely some shorter one. On the formal side, derivatives relative to closed intervals, the M=0M = 0M=0 corner of T0T_0T0​, and passing between the differential and the integral form of the IVP all need care.

For Theorem 2.17 the difficulty is that "every solution is defined on all of R\mathbb{R}R" is a statement about maximal solutions, and the book defines these only through a gluing construction. Without a Lipschitz condition that construction is no longer unique. An a-priori bound on ∣x(t)∣|x(t)|∣x(t)∣ alone does not give extension beyond a finite endpoint.

Formalization scope

  • State space. Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), so ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm. The right-hand side is a total function f:R×Rn→Rnf : \mathbb{R} \times \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}^nf:R×Rn→Rn; hypotheses restrict attention to UUU or VVV. Banach spaces are real normed spaces with CompleteSpace.
  • Solutions. IsSolutionOn U f I x: for every t∈It \in It∈I, (t,x(t))∈U(t, x(t)) \in U(t,x(t))∈U and xxx has derivative f(t,x(t))f(t, x(t))f(t,x(t)) at ttt relative to III. Initial conditions are separate hypotheses.
  • Closed ball. The book writes the open ball Bδ(x0)B_\delta(x_0)Bδ​(x0​) in Theorems 2.2 and 2.19 but takes a maximum over VVV and uses ∣x(t)−x0∣≤δ|x(t) - x_0| \le \delta∣x(t)−x0​∣≤δ in the proofs. The statements use the closed ball: over the open ball the maximum may not exist, and the solution can reach the sphere at t0+T0t_0 + T_0t0​+T0​.
  • Quantifier readings. "The maximum of ∣f∣|f|∣f∣ on VVV" is a variable MMM with IsGreatest {|f(p)| : p ∈ V} M. T0T_0T0​ is if M = 0 then T else min T (δ / M). "Some interval around t0t_0t0​" in Theorem 2.2 is ∃ε>0\exists \varepsilon > 0∃ε>0 with (t0−ε,t0+ε)(t_0 - \varepsilon, t_0 + \varepsilon)(t0​−ε,t0​+ε), and "unique" means uniqueness on every interval containing t0t_0t0​. In Theorem 2.8 the suprema LLL, MMM of (2.41) become arbitrary constants L≥0L \ge 0L≥0, MMM bounding the same quantities, which is equivalent because the bound is monotone in both; the case L=0L = 0L=0 uses the limit M∣t−t0∣M|t - t_0|M∣t−t0​∣. In Theorem 2.17 the constants M(T),L(T)M(T), L(T)M(T),L(T) are existential inside ∀T>0\forall T > 0∀T>0, so they may depend on TTT but not on xxx. "All solutions are defined for all ttt" means that every solution on an open interval extends to a solution on R\mathbb{R}R.
  • Hypotheses of Theorem 2.17. Section 2.6 opens with a standing assumption of local uniqueness, but Theorem 2.17's own text needs only continuity and (2.66), and the book's remark after Theorem 2.13 covers maximal solutions without uniqueness. The statement assumes only continuity of fff and (2.66); it is therefore at least as strong as the book's.
  • Added regularity. Lemma 2.7 assumes ψ,α,β\psi, \alpha, \betaψ,α,β continuous on [0,T][0, T][0,T], which the book leaves implicit.
  • Ruling out trivial readings. An existence statement in which the interval collapses to a point would be trivially true. Here T,δ>0T, \delta > 0T,δ>0 are required, T0=TT_0 = TT0​=T when M=0M = 0M=0 (never Lean's δ/0=0\delta/0 = 0δ/0=0), and a solution must satisfy the differential equation at every point of [t0,t0+T0][t_0, t_0 + T_0][t0​,t0​+T0​] with the book's T0T_0T0​, not on some unspecified shorter interval.

A complete development needs derivatives within intervals, interval integrals, uniform convergence and compactness in C([a,b],Rn)C([a,b], \mathbb{R}^n)C([a,b],Rn). The definitions IsSolutionOn and LocallyLipschitzSecond are reused throughout the Teschl series. Contributions that connect these statements to Mathlib's IsPicardLindelof, ContractingWith and BoundedContinuousFunction.arzela_ascoli are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, American Mathematical Society, 2012. Author's preliminary version: https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf ; published version: https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/140
  • G. Peano, Démonstration de l'intégrabilité des équations différentielles ordinaires, Mathematische Annalen 37 (1890), 182–228. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01200235
  • S. Banach, Sur les opérations dans les ensembles abstraits et leur application aux équations intégrales, Fundamenta Mathematicae 3 (1922), 133–181. https://doi.org/10.4064/fm-3-1-133-181
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Global Convergence of Stochastic Fictitious Play III: Almost Sure Convergence to Linearly Stable Rest Points in Potential GamesResearch Paper

Motivation

Stochastic fictitious play is a basic model of learning in repeated games. Each period every player best responds to the empirical frequencies of the opponents' past play, after the player's payoffs have been hit by a fresh random shock. It was introduced by Fudenberg and Kreps (1993), is a standard object in the theory of learning in games (Fudenberg and Levine, The Theory of Learning in Games, 1998), and underlies the quantal-response and logit-learning models used in experimental economics and multi-agent reinforcement learning. The question is whether the players' beliefs settle down, and on what.

Potential games, in which all players receive the same payoff, cover pure coordination games and, after the usual payoff transformations, congestion games and weighted potential games. For them Hofbauer and Sandholm (Econometrica 70, 2002) proved that stochastic fictitious play converges almost surely, and that under a generic regularity condition the limit is a single linearly stable rest point of the perturbed best response dynamic.

Timeline. Fudenberg and Kreps (1993) and Kaniovski and Young (1995) established convergence in 2×2 games. Benaïm and Hirsch (1999) related the process to its mean ordinary differential equation and proved convergence in some ppp player, two strategy games. Hofbauer (2000) and Hofbauer and Hopkins (2000) constructed Lyapunov functions for the deterministically perturbed dynamics. Hofbauer and Sandholm (2002) combined these with a representation theorem for random utility models and with Pemantle's (1990) nonconvergence theorem to obtain the result formalized here.

Setting

A ppp player game has finite strategy sets Sα={0,…,nα−1}S^\alpha = \{0,\dots,n^\alpha-1\}Sα={0,…,nα−1} and utilities uα:S→Ru^\alpha : S \to \mathbb Ruα:S→R on pure profiles S=∏βSβS = \prod_\beta S^\betaS=∏β​Sβ. The game is a potential game if uα(s)=uβ(s)u^\alpha(s) = u^\beta(s)uα(s)=uβ(s) for all players and all profiles. Mixed profiles form Σ=∏αΔSα\Sigma = \prod_\alpha \Delta S^\alphaΣ=∏α​ΔSα, and player α\alphaα's payoff vector is Uiα(x−α)=∑s: sα=iuα(s)∏β≠αxsββU^\alpha_i(x^{-\alpha}) = \sum_{s:\,s^\alpha=i} u^\alpha(s)\prod_{\beta\ne\alpha}x^\beta_{s^\beta}Uiα​(x−α)=∑s:sα=i​uα(s)∏β=α​xsββ​.

Player α\alphaα's payoffs are perturbed by a random vector εα\varepsilon^\alphaεα with a strictly positive density fαf^\alphafα on Rnα\mathbb R^{n^\alpha}Rnα. The choice function is Ciα(π)=P(arg⁡max⁡jπj+εjα=i)C^\alpha_i(\pi) = P(\arg\max_j \pi_j + \varepsilon^\alpha_j = i)Ciα​(π)=P(argmaxj​πj​+εjα​=i), assumed continuously differentiable, and the perturbed best response is B~α(x−α)=Cα(Uα(x−α))\tilde B^\alpha(x^{-\alpha}) = C^\alpha(U^\alpha(x^{-\alpha}))B~α(x−α)=Cα(Uα(x−α)).

In standard stochastic fictitious play, shocks εtα\varepsilon^\alpha_tεtα​ are independent over time and across players. From an arbitrary initial pure profile, at time t+1t+1t+1 each player plays a maximizer of Ukα(Zt−α)+(εtα)kU^\alpha_k(Z_t^{-\alpha}) + (\varepsilon^\alpha_t)_kUkα​(Zt−α​)+(εtα​)k​, where the beliefs are the time averages

Zt=1t∑u=1tζu.Z_t = \frac1t\sum_{u=1}^t \zeta_u .Zt​=t1​u=1∑t​ζu​.

The mean dynamic of this process is the perturbed best response dynamic

(P)x˙α=B~α(x−α)−xα.(P)\qquad \dot x^\alpha = \tilde B^\alpha(x^{-\alpha}) - x^\alpha .(P)x˙α=B~α(x−α)−xα.

A rest point x∗x^*x∗ of (P) is hyperbolic if every eigenvalue of DF(x∗)DF(x^*)DF(x∗) restricted to the tangent space ∏αR0nα\prod_\alpha \mathbb R^{n^\alpha}_0∏α​R0nα​ of Σ\SigmaΣ has nonzero real part, and linearly stable if every such eigenvalue has negative real part. RP(P)RP(P)RP(P) and LS(P)LS(P)LS(P) denote the rest points and the linearly stable rest points.

By Theorem 2.1 of the paper, Cα(π)=arg⁡max⁡y∈int⁡Δ(y⋅π−Vα(y))C^\alpha(\pi) = \arg\max_{y\in\operatorname{int}\Delta}(y\cdot\pi - V^\alpha(y))Cα(π)=argmaxy∈intΔ​(y⋅π−Vα(y)) for an admissible deterministic perturbation VαV^\alphaVα, so (P) coincides with the deterministically perturbed dynamic (PV), in which the argmax replaces CαC^\alphaCα.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.1(iii)

For every potential game, every family of densities meeting the conditions above, every probability space, independent shock family and initial profile:

  1. if the shocks are smooth enough that the VαV^\alphaVα are CNC^NCN, N=∑α(nα−1)N = \sum_\alpha(n^\alpha-1)N=∑α​(nα−1), then
P(ω(Zt) is a connected subset of RP(P))=1;P\big(\omega(Z_t)\text{ is a connected subset of } RP(P)\big) = 1;P(ω(Zt​) is a connected subset of RP(P))=1;
  1. if every rest point of (P) is hyperbolic and the field of (P) is C2C^2C2, then
P(lim⁡t→∞Zt exists and lies in LS(P))=1.P\Big(\lim_{t\to\infty} Z_t \text{ exists and lies in } LS(P)\Big) = 1.P(t→∞lim​Zt​ exists and lies in LS(P))=1.

Milestones

In attack order: Theorem 2.1 (the representation), Proposition 4.1 (the function Π(x)=∑su1(s)∏αxsαα−∑αVα(xα)\Pi(x) = \sum_s u^1(s)\prod_\alpha x^\alpha_{s^\alpha} - \sum_\alpha V^\alpha(x^\alpha)Π(x)=∑s​u1(s)∏α​xsαα​−∑α​Vα(xα) is a strict Lyapunov function for (PV)), the identification of the critical points of Π\PiΠ with the rest points of (PV), Proposition 4.2 (CR(PV)=RP(PV)CR(PV) = RP(PV)CR(PV)=RP(PV) under CNC^NCN smoothness), Proposition 4.3 (under hyperbolicity RP(PV)RP(PV)RP(PV) is finite and equals CR(PV)CR(PV)CR(PV)), and Lemmas A.5 and A.4 (a uniform nondegeneracy condition for the noise of the process).

Significance

The result. Theorem 6.1(iii) says that decentralised, boundedly rational learning in common-interest games does not cycle or wander: beliefs converge to a rest point of the perturbed dynamic, and generically to one that is linearly stable, hence a local maximizer of the perturbed potential Π\PiΠ. Rest points approximate Nash equilibria as the noise vanishes (Proposition 3.1 of the paper), so the theorem is a selection result for equilibria reached by learning. It is also a template for the stochastic-approximation analysis of learning algorithms whose mean dynamic has a Lyapunov function.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper, but none of its ingredients is machine-checked: the random utility representation, chain recurrence of flows, Lyapunov arguments for (PV), and the stochastic-approximation step (Benaïm–Hirsch, Benaïm, Pemantle) are all absent from Mathlib and from this platform. A complete development produces a reusable stochastic-approximation layer, not only this theorem.

Difficulty

The obvious argument, "(P) has a strict Lyapunov function, so the process converges to its rest points", fails twice. First, a strict Lyapunov function does not by itself make every chain recurrent point a rest point (the paper cites counterexamples of Akin and of Benaïm); the step needs either Sard's theorem for a CNC^NCN function or finiteness of the rest points, and the stochastic-approximation theory controls the process only through the chain recurrent set. Second, convergence to linearly stable points requires showing that the process avoids unstable rest points. This rests on Pemantle's theorem, whose nondegeneracy hypothesis must be verified uniformly over states and directions (Lemma A.4). Neither step follows from the ODE alone: the theorem is about the random process ZtZ_tZt​.

Formalization scope

Players are Fin p with p ≥ 2, strategies Fin (n α) with n α ≥ 1, and mixed profiles live in the ambient space (α : Fin p) → Fin (n α) → ℝ, on which every vector field is defined. Choice probabilities are probabilities of strict argmax events under volume.withDensity (f α). The process ZtZ_tZt​ is defined pathwise from the shocks, ties broken by the smallest index (a null event), and the theorem quantifies over every probability space and every independent shock family with the given laws. Derivatives of VαV^\alphaVα are those of VαV^\alphaVα composed with the projection onto the plane ∑iyi=1\sum_i y_i = 1∑i​yi​=1. Eigenvalues are the complex roots of the characteristic polynomial of the derivative restricted to the tangent space of Σ\SigmaΣ. Solutions of a dynamic are differentiable curves on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) that stay in Σ\SigmaΣ, and chain recurrence uses ε\varepsilonε-chains with times ti≥1t_i \ge 1ti​≥1.

A formalization about the ODE (P) in place of the process ZtZ_tZt​, a fixed noise law such as logit, or convergence to RP(P)RP(P)RP(P) in place of LS(P)LS(P)LS(P) would prove a different and weaker statement. These are excluded.

Needed infrastructure: the random utility representation (mission I of this series), flows and chain recurrence of C1C^1C1 vector fields on compact sets, Sard's theorem for real-valued CNC^NCN functions, and the stochastic-approximation theorems of Benaïm–Hirsch (1999, Thm 3.3), Benaïm (1999, Props. 5.3 and 6.4) and Pemantle (1990, Thm 1). The last three are reusable well beyond this mission, and contributions of any of them are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Hofbauer and W. H. Sandholm, On the Global Convergence of Stochastic Fictitious Play, Econometrica 70(6), 2265–2294, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1111/1468-0262.00376
  • M. Benaïm and M. W. Hirsch, Mixed Equilibria and Dynamical Systems Arising from Fictitious Play in Perturbed Games, Games and Economic Behavior 29, 36–72, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1006/game.1999.0717
  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, 1–68, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • R. Pemantle, Nonconvergence to Unstable Points in Urn Models and Stochastic Approximations, Annals of Probability 18(2), 698–712, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176990853
  • D. Fudenberg and D. M. Kreps, Learning Mixed Equilibria, Games and Economic Behavior 5, 320–367, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1006/game.1993.1021
  • J. Hofbauer and E. Hopkins, Learning in Perturbed Asymmetric Games, Games and Economic Behavior 52, 133–152, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.geb.2004.06.006
14 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algorithmic Game TheoryProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Global Convergence of Stochastic Fictitious Play II: Almost Sure Convergence in Zero-Sum Games and Symmetric Games with an Interior ESSResearch Paper

Motivation

Fictitious play is the oldest model of learning in games: players repeatedly play a fixed normal form game, and each round every player best-responds to the empirical frequencies of the opponents' past play. Brown (1951) proposed it as an algorithm for computing the value of a zero-sum game, and Robinson (1951) proved that the empirical frequencies converge to the set of equilibria in that case. In stochastic fictitious play (Fudenberg and Kreps 1993) each player's payoffs are perturbed by fresh random shocks before every choice. The shocks make best responses single-valued and smooth in beliefs, which puts the process within reach of stochastic approximation theory: its long-run behaviour is governed by a deterministic perturbed best response dynamic.

Before Hofbauer and Sandholm (2002), convergence of stochastic fictitious play was known only for 2×2 games (Fudenberg and Kreps 1993; Kaniovski and Young 1995) and for certain games with two strategies per player (Benaïm and Hirsch 1999). The difficulty was the perturbed dynamic itself, whose vector field involves choice probabilities with no closed form for general noise distributions. Hofbauer and Sandholm showed that every such dynamic can be rewritten with a deterministic payoff perturbation (their Theorem 2.1), and used that to carry Lyapunov functions over to arbitrary noise distributions. This mission covers the first two classes of games in their main convergence theorem: symmetric games with an interior evolutionarily stable strategy, and two player zero-sum games.

Setting

A two player normal form game has strategy sets S1={1,…,n1}S^1 = \{1,\dots,n^1\}S1={1,…,n1} and S2={1,…,n2}S^2 = \{1,\dots,n^2\}S2={1,…,n2} and utilities uα:S1×S2→Ru^\alpha : S^1 \times S^2 \to \mathbb Ruα:S1×S2→R. Player α\alphaα's mixed strategies form the simplex ΔSα\Delta S^\alphaΔSα, and Σ=ΔS1×ΔS2\Sigma = \Delta S^1 \times \Delta S^2Σ=ΔS1×ΔS2. The payoff vector Uα(x−α)∈RnαU^\alpha(x^{-\alpha}) \in \mathbb R^{n^\alpha}Uα(x−α)∈Rnα lists the expected payoff of each pure strategy of α\alphaα against the opponent's mixed strategy. The game is zero-sum if u1(s)=−u2(s)u^1(s) = -u^2(s)u1(s)=−u2(s) for every profile sss.

Each player α\alphaα has a shock density fαf^\alphafα on Rnα\mathbb R^{n^\alpha}Rnα. The choice function Cα(π)i=P(argmax⁡jπj+εj=i)C^\alpha(\pi)_i = P(\operatorname{argmax}_j \pi_j + \varepsilon_j = i)Cα(π)i​=P(argmaxj​πj​+εj​=i), for ε\varepsilonε with density fαf^\alphafα, gives the perturbed best response B~α(x−α)=Cα(Uα(x−α))\tilde B^\alpha(x^{-\alpha}) = C^\alpha(U^\alpha(x^{-\alpha}))B~α(x−α)=Cα(Uα(x−α)). The densities are required to be strictly positive with continuously differentiable choice functions ("the conditions of Theorem 2.1").

Standard stochastic fictitious play. Pure strategies are identified with basis vectors eie_iei​. Choices ζ1\zeta_1ζ1​ are arbitrary. At every time t≥1t \ge 1t≥1 each player α\alphaα draws a shock εtα\varepsilon^\alpha_tεtα​ with density fαf^\alphafα and plays at time t+1t+1t+1 the pure strategy maximizing Ukα(Zt−α)+(εtα)kU^\alpha_k(Z^{-\alpha}_t) + (\varepsilon^\alpha_t)_kUkα​(Zt−α​)+(εtα​)k​, where the beliefs are the time averages

Zt=1t∑u=1tζu∈Σ.Z_t = \frac1t \sum_{u=1}^t \zeta_u \in \Sigma .Zt​=t1​u=1∑t​ζu​∈Σ.

The shocks are independent over time and across players. The expected motion of ZtZ_tZt​ is the perturbed best response dynamic

(P)x˙α=B~α(x−α)−xαon Σ.\text{(P)}\qquad \dot x^\alpha = \tilde B^\alpha(x^{-\alpha}) - x^\alpha \quad\text{on } \Sigma .(P)x˙α=B~α(x−α)−xαon Σ.

Symmetric games. A two player game is symmetric if S1=S2={1,…,m}S^1 = S^2 = \{1,\dots,m\}S1=S2={1,…,m} and u1(i,j)=u2(j,i)u^1(i,j) = u^2(j,i)u1(i,j)=u2(j,i); it is described by the matrix Aij=u1(i,j)A_{ij} = u^1(i,j)Aij​=u1(i,j), and U1(z)=AzU^1(z) = AzU1(z)=Az. In symmetric stochastic fictitious play two players in roles 1 and 2 play at every time, their shocks are independent and identically distributed with one density fff, and the state is the average of all past plays in both roles,

Z^t=12t∑u=1t(ζ^u1+ζ^u2)∈ΔS1.\hat Z_t = \frac1{2t}\sum_{u=1}^t \big(\hat\zeta^1_u + \hat\zeta^2_u\big) \in \Delta S^1 .Z^t​=2t1​u=1∑t​(ζ^​u1​+ζ^​u2​)∈ΔS1.

Its mean dynamic is (SP) x˙=C(Ax)−x\text{(SP)}\ \dot x = C(Ax) - x(SP) x˙=C(Ax)−x on ΔS1\Delta S^1ΔS1. A mixed strategy x∗x^*x∗ in the interior of ΔS1\Delta S^1ΔS1 is an interior evolutionarily stable strategy (ESS) if x∗⋅Ax>x⋅Axx^*\cdot Ax > x\cdot Axx∗⋅Ax>x⋅Ax for all mixed x≠x∗x \ne x^*x=x∗ near x∗x^*x∗.

Rest points and chain recurrence. For a dynamic x˙=F(x)\dot x = F(x)x˙=F(x) on a compact set XXX, the rest points are the zeros of FFF in XXX. A point xxx is chain recurrent if for every ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 one can return from xxx to xxx by following solution segments of length at least 111, with jumps of size less than ε\varepsilonε between segments.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.1 (i) and (ii)

(i) If AAA has an interior ESS, then (SP) has a unique rest point x^\hat xx^ and

P(lim⁡t→∞Z^t=x^)=1.P\Big(\lim_{t\to\infty} \hat Z_t = \hat x\Big) = 1 .P(t→∞lim​Z^t​=x^)=1.

(ii) If the two player game is zero-sum, then (P) has a unique rest point x∗x^*x∗ and

P(lim⁡t→∞Zt=x∗)=1.P\Big(\lim_{t\to\infty} Z_t = x^*\Big) = 1 .P(t→∞lim​Zt​=x∗)=1.

Both hold for all shock densities meeting the conditions of Theorem 2.1, all probability spaces carrying the shocks, and all initial choices.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 2.1: for such a density, the choice function CCC is the unique maximizer C(π)=argmax⁡y∈int⁡Δ(y⋅π−V(y))C(\pi) = \operatorname{argmax}_{y \in \operatorname{int}\Delta}(y\cdot\pi - V(y))C(π)=argmaxy∈intΔ​(y⋅π−V(y)) for one admissible deterministic perturbation VVV.
  2. With an interior ESS, Λ^(x)=x⋅Ax−V(x)−W(Ax)\hat\Lambda(x) = x\cdot Ax - V(x) - W(Ax)Λ^(x)=x⋅Ax−V(x)−W(Ax), where W(π)=max⁡y(y⋅π−V(y))W(\pi) = \max_y (y\cdot\pi - V(y))W(π)=maxy​(y⋅π−V(y)), is strictly concave and a strict Lyapunov function for the deterministically perturbed dynamic (SPV).
  3. Its maximizer is the unique chain recurrent point of (SPV).
  4. In zero-sum games, Λ(x1,x2)=−V1(x1)−W1(U1(x2))−V2(x2)−W2(U2(x1))\Lambda(x^1,x^2) = -V^1(x^1) - W^1(U^1(x^2)) - V^2(x^2) - W^2(U^2(x^1))Λ(x1,x2)=−V1(x1)−W1(U1(x2))−V2(x2)−W2(U2(x1)) is strictly concave and a strict Lyapunov function for (PV).
  5. Its maximizer is the unique chain recurrent point of (P).
  6. The maximizer of Λ^\hat\LambdaΛ^ is the unique chain recurrent point of (SP).

Significance

The theorem gives global, almost sure convergence of a learning process for arbitrary noise distributions, not only for the logit (Gumbel) noise under which the perturbed dynamic has a closed form. For zero-sum games it is the stochastic counterpart of Robinson's theorem. For symmetric games with an interior ESS it shows that a population learning by stochastic fictitious play settles at a single mixed state. Since the choice functions are continuous, the players' choice probabilities converge as well. The limit is the rest point of the perturbed dynamic, which approximates a Nash equilibrium (in case (i), the ESS) as the noise vanishes.

On the formal side, the paper's results are proved, but no part of them is machine-checked, and the platform has no model of learning in games, of chain recurrence, or of stochastic approximation. The mission produces a formal model of stochastic fictitious play as a random process, formal statements of the Hofbauer and Hofbauer–Hopkins Lyapunov functions, and the chain recurrence characterizations that connect them to the process.

Difficulty

The obvious route replaces the process ZtZ_tZt​ by the ODE (P) and argues that (P) converges. That step is where the argument is incomplete: convergence of every solution of (P) does not give convergence of the stochastic process, because a stochastic approximation can in principle circulate near a set of orbits the ODE never follows. The right invariant is the chain recurrent set, and the limit sets of the process lie in a connected component of it (Benaïm and Hirsch 1999; Benaïm 1999). The characterization therefore has to be of chain recurrence, which is strictly weaker than asymptotic stability of individual orbits.

The second obstacle is that (P) itself is defined through the noise distribution and admits no useful Lyapunov function in general. The Lyapunov functions exist for the deterministic form (PV)/(SPV), and moving between the two forms requires the representation of Theorem 2.1, whose perturbation VVV has no closed form either.

Formalization scope

Players and strategies are indexed from 000. Mixed profiles live in ∏αRnα\prod_\alpha \mathbb R^{n^\alpha}∏α​Rnα and every vector field is defined on that ambient space. The processes are defined pathwise from a family of shock vectors on an arbitrary probability space. Ties in the argmax are broken by the smallest index, an event of probability zero because the shocks have densities. The shock drawn at time ttt produces the choice at time t+1t+1t+1. Shock densities are arbitrary strictly positive densities with continuously differentiable choice functions; no noise law is fixed, and the two players' densities in (ii) may differ. Independence is joint over times and players (and roles in (i)). The symmetric process has its own state in one simplex and is not the standard process applied to a symmetric game.

Deterministic perturbations are functions defined on the whole space whose values off the open simplex are ignored; derivatives are taken of their composition with the projection onto the affine plane {∑iyi=1}\{\sum_i y_i = 1\}{∑i​yi​=1}. Perturbed best responses in (PV) and (SPV) are supplied as maps together with the hypothesis that they are the unique maximizers. A strict Lyapunov function must increase strictly along every non-constant solution on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞). The ESS definition includes x≠x∗x \ne x^*x=x∗, which the source omits.

The conclusions assert existence and uniqueness of the rest point; they are not hypotheses. A statement for the ODE (P) in place of the process ZtZ_tZt​, for one fixed noise law, or with the ESS as the limit point would be a different theorem.

A complete development needs Theorem 2.1 (convex duality and the Legendre transform on the simplex), existence and uniqueness of solutions of (P), basic chain recurrence theory, and the stochastic approximation results of Benaïm and Hirsch, which are not restated here and are welcome as independent contributions. The model layer (games, payoff vectors, choice functions, stochastic fictitious play) is shared with the other missions of this series.

Selected references

  • J. Hofbauer and W. H. Sandholm, On the Global Convergence of Stochastic Fictitious Play, Econometrica 70(6), 2265–2294, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1111/1468-0262.00376 (theorem numbers and pages here follow the authors' manuscript of February 21, 2002).
  • D. Fudenberg and D. M. Kreps, Learning Mixed Equilibria, Games and Economic Behavior 5, 320–367, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1006/game.1993.1021
  • Y. M. Kaniovski and H. P. Young, Learning Dynamics in Games with Stochastic Perturbations, Games and Economic Behavior 11, 330–363, 1995. https://doi.org/10.1006/game.1995.1054
  • M. Benaïm and M. W. Hirsch, Mixed Equilibria and Dynamical Systems Arising from Fictitious Play in Perturbed Games, Games and Economic Behavior 29, 36–72, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1006/game.1999.0717
  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, 1–68, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • J. Robinson, An Iterative Method of Solving a Game, Annals of Mathematics 54, 296–301, 1951. https://doi.org/10.2307/1969530
  • J. Hofbauer and E. Hopkins, Learning in Perturbed Asymmetric Games, Games and Economic Behavior 52, 133–152, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.geb.2004.06.006
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 2 of 7Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me